Peugeot 308 Manual PDF

Handbook
On-line handbook
Select one of the following means of access to view your

handbook on-line...
Find your handbook on the Peugeot website, under Scan this code for direct access to your handbook.
"MyPeugeot".
This personal space offers advice and other useful information for
the care and maintenance of your vehicle.
If the "MyPeugeot" function is not available on the Peugeot

public website for your country, you can find your handbook at the
following address:
http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/ddb/
Select:
the language,
the vehicle, its body style,
the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of registration of
your vehicle.
Referring to the handbook on-line also gives you access to the latest information available, easily identified by the bookmark, associated with
this symbol:
Welcome
This handbook describes all of the equipment available

in the whole range.
Thank you for choosing a 308.
Your vehicle will be fitted with some of the equipment described This handbook has been designed to enable
in this document, depending on its trim level, version and the
specification for the country in which it is sold. you to make the most of your vehicle in all
situations.
The descriptions and illustrations are given without any
obligation. Automobiles PEUGEOT reserves the right to modify
the technical specifications, equipment and accessories without
having to update this edition of the handbook.
This document is an integral part of your vehicle. It should be

passed on to the new user in the event of sale or transfer.
Key
safety warning additional information contributes to the protection of the

environment
Contents
Overview . Access Lighting and visibility

Remote control key 48 Mirrors 106
"Keyless Entry and Starting" with Lighting control stalk 108
remote control 54 Direction indicators 111
"Keyless Entry and Starting" Daytime running lamps 112
on your person 56
Automatic illumination of headlamps 112
Boot 59
Side spotlamps 114
Alarm 65
Headlamp beam height adjustment 114
Eco-driving . Electric windows 69
Wiper controls
Automatic rain sensitive wipers
115
117
Ease of use and comfort
PEUGEOT i-Cockpit 71
Steering wheel adjustment 71
Front seats 72
Rear seats (hatchback) 77
Rear seats (SW) 78
Instruments Interior fittings 80 Safety
Instrument panel 12 Front armrest 82 Hazard warning lamps 119
Indicator and warning lamps 13 Boot fittings (hatchback) 86 Emergency or assistance call 119
Gauges and indicators 28 Boot fittings (SW) 87 Horn 120
Distance recorders 32 Heating and Ventilation 90 ESC system 120
Trip computer 34 Heating 92 Seat belts 123
Touch screen 37 Manual air conditioning 92 Airbags 126
Setting the date and time 44 Manual air conditioning (Touch screen) 94 Child seats 130
Dual-zone digital air conditioning Deactivating the passenger's front airbag 133
(Touch screen) 96 ISOFIX mountings and child seats 139
Front demist - defrost 101 Child lock 145
Rear screen demist - defrost 102
Panoramic sunroof 103
Courtesy lamps 104
Interior mood lighting 105
Contents
Driving Practical information Technical data

Driving recommendations 146 Fuel tank 213 Petrol engines 278
Starting-switching off the engine 148 Diesel misfuel prevention 214 Petrol weights 281
Manual parking brake 154 Snow chains 216 Diesel engines 284
Electric parking brake 155 Very cold climate screen 217 Diesel weights 288
Hill start assist 162 Towing a trailer 218 Dimensions 292
5-speed manual gearbox 163 Energy economy mode 219 Identification markings 295
6-speed manual gearbox 163 Accessories 220
Gear efficiency indicator 164 Changing a wiper blade 222
Automatic gearbox 165 Fitting roof bars 223
Dynamic pack 169 Bonnet 226
Stop & Start 170 Petrol engine 227
Memorising speeds 173 Diesel engine 228
Speed limiter 174 Checking levels 229
Cruise control 177 Checks 233
Active cruise control 180 AdBlue ® additive and SCR system
(BlueHDi Diesel) 235
Audio equipment and telematics
Display of inter-vehicle time 187
Emergency collision alert system, Emergency or assistance 296
emergency collision braking system 190 DENON equipment 298
Blind spot sensors 195 7-inch touch screen 299
Parking sensors 198 PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5) 363
Reversing camera 200 In the event of a breakdown
Park Assist 201 Warning triangle 243
Under-inflation detection 209 Temporary puncture
repair kit 244
Changing a wheel 250
Changing a bulb
Changing a fuse
256
266
Alphabetical index .
12 V battery 272
Towing 275
Running out of fuel (Diesel) 277
Overview
Exterior Electric windows, deactivation 69-70
Keyless Entry and Starting remote Door mirrors 106, 114

control 54-58, 61-63
Blind spot sensors 195-197
Remote control key 48-53, 63
Starting 148-154
Panoramic sunroof 103 Lighting 108-114
Roof bars, bicycle carrier 223-224 Daytime running lamps (LEDs) 112
Accessories 220-221 Headlamp beam adjustment 114
Changing bulbs 256-260
Wipers 115-118 - front lamps
- foglamps
Changing a wiper blade 118, 222 - direction indicator repeaters
Very cold climate screen 217
Boot 59-60
- opening / closing Keyless Entry and Starting 54-58
- emergency release Doors 48-50, 52
Temporary puncture repair kit 244-249 - opening / closing
Warning triangle 243 - central locking
- emergency control
Alarm 65-68
Parking sensors 198-199
Reversing camera 200
Towbar 147, 218 Electronic stability
Towing 275-276 control (ESC) 120-122
Park Assist 201-208 Snow chains 216
Tyre pressures 244, 255, 295
Inder-inflation detection 209-212
Changing bulbs 261-265 Changing a wheel 250-255
- rear lamps - tools
- 3rd brake lamp Fuel tank, misfuel prevention 213-215 - removing / refitting
- number plate lamps Automatic emergency braking 190-194
- foglamp
4
Overview .
Interior
Hatchback Front seats 72-76
- manual adjustments
- electric adjustments
- head restraints
- heated seats
- electric lumbar adjustment
- massage
PEUGEOT i-Cockpit 71
Boot fittings 86
Warning triangle (stowing) 243
AdBlue tank 235-242
Airbags 126-129
Adjusting the steering wheel 71
Rear seats 77
Rear armrest, ski flap 85
Interior fittings 80-84

- mats
- front armrest
- 12 V accessory socket
Child seats 130-144 - USB port / Auxiliary socket
ISOFIX child seats 139-143 - 230 V socket
Manual child lock 145 Deactivating the passenger's front
airbag 127, 133
Seat belts 123-125
5
Overview
SW Front seats 72-76

- manual adjustments
- electric adjustments
- head restraints
- heated seats
- electric lumbar adjustment
Boot fittings 87 - massage
Luggage cover 88-89 PEUGEOT i-Cockpit 71
High load retaining net 89
Warning triangle (stowing) 243
AdBlue tank 235-242
Airbags 126-129
Adjusting the steering wheel 71
Rear seats 78-79

Rear armrest, ski flap 85
Interior fittings 80-84

- mats
- front armrest
- 12 V accessory socket
Child seats 130-144 - USB port / Auxiliary socket
ISOFIX child seats 139-143 - 230 V socket
Manual child lock 145 Deactivating the passenger's front
airbag 127, 133
Seat belts 123-125
6
Overview .
Instruments and controls
Courtesy lamps 104
Touch screen 37-43, 299-361
Interior mood lighting, footwell
lighting 105
Rear view mirror 107
Peugeot Connect SOS, Peugeot
Connect Assistance 119, 296-297
Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5) 363-382
Dashboard fuses 266-269
Setting the date and time 44-47
Heating, ventilation 90-93

Manual air conditioning 92-93
Manual air conditioning
Opening the bonnet 226
(Touch screen) 94-95
Dual-zone air conditioning
(Touch screen) 96-99
Air recirculation 100
Front demisting / defrosting 101
Rear screen
demist/defrost 102
5/6-speed manual
gearbox 163
Gear shift indicator 164
Automatic gearbox 165-168
USB port / Auxiliary
Dynamic function 169 Manual parking brake 154 socket 83, 316, 370 / 371
Stop & Start 170-172 Electric parking brake 155-161
Hill start assist 162
7
Overview
Instruments and controls (cont.)

Trip computer 34, 36
Trip computer (Touch screen) 35, 36
Setting the date/time
(Touch screen) 44
Instrument panel 12
Setting the date/time
Warning lamps 13-27
(screens C, A, A without audio
Indicators 28-32 system) 45-47
Gear shift indicator 164 Reversing camera 200
PEUGEOT i-Cockpit 71 Display of inter-vehicle
time 187-189
Collision risk alert 190-194
Automatic emergency
braking 193-194
Lighting 108-114
Direction indicators 111
Wipers 115-118
Trip computer 34-36
Headlamp beam adjustment 114
Hazard warning lamps 119

Locking/unlocking from
Stop & Start 170-172 inside 64
Alarm 65-68
Memorising speeds 173 Steering wheel adjustment 71

Speed limiter 174-176 Horn 120
Cruise control 177-179
Active cruise control 180-186
8
Overview .
Maintenance - Technical data
Running out of fuel, 12V battery 272-274

Diesel (primimg pump) 277 Load reduction, economy mode 219
Engine
Checking levels 229-232 compartment fuses 266, 270-271
- oil
- brake fluid
- coolant Petrol weights 281-283
- screenwash, headlamp wash fluid Diesel weights 288-291
- additive (Diesel with particle filter)
Checking components 233-234
- battery
- air / passenger compartment filter
- oil filter
- particle filter (Diesel)
- brake pads / discs
Changing bulbs 256-265

- front
- rear
Dimensions 292-294
Identification markings 295
Opening the bonnet 226

Under the bonnet, petrol 227
Under the bonnet, Diesel 228
Petrol engines 278-280
Diesel engines 284-287
AdBlue 235-242
9
Eco-driving
Eco-driving
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO2 emissions.
Optimise the use of your gearbox Control the use of your electrical
equipment
With a manual gearbox, move off gently and change up without waiting. Before moving off, if the passenger compartment is too warm, ventilate it
During acceleration change up early. by opening the windows and air vents before using the air conditioning.
Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows and leave the air vents
open.
With an automatic or electronic gearbox, give preference to automatic
Remember to make use of equipment that can help keep the
mode and avoid pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly.
temperature in the passenger compartment down (sunroof and window
blinds...).
The gear shift indicator invites you engage the most suitable gear: as Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has automatic regulation, as
soon as the indication is displayed in the instrument panel, follow it soon as the desired temperature is attained.
straight away. Switch off the demisting and defrosting controls, if not automatic.
For vehicles fitted with an electronic or automatic gearbox, this Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible.
indicator appears only in manual mode.
Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps when the level of light
does not require their use.
Drive smoothly
Avoid running the engine before moving off, particularly in winter; your
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use engine braking rather
vehicle will warm up much faster while driving.
than the brake pedal, and press the accelerator progressively. These
practices contribute towards a reduction in fuel consumption and
CO2 emissions and also helps reduce the background traffic noise. As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your multimedia devices
(film, music, video game...), you will contribute towards limiting the
consumption of electrical energy, and so of fuel.
If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of the system at speeds
Disconnect your portable devices before leaving the vehicle.
above 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is flowing well.
10
Eco-driving .
Limit the causes of excess consumption Observe the recommendations on

maintenance
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the heaviest items in the Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, referring to the label in
bottom of the boot, as close as possible to the rear seats. the door aperture, driver's side.
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and reduce wind resistance (roof Carry out this check in particular:
bars, roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use a roof box in preference. - before a long journey,
Remove roof bars and roof racks after use. - at each change of season,
- after a long period out of use.
Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres on any trailer or caravan.
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit your summer tyres.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, oil filter, air filter,
passenger compartment filter...) and observe the schedule of
operations recommended in the manufacturer's service schedule.
With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system is faulty your vehicle
becomes polluting; go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay to have the emissions of nitrous oxides brought back to
the legal level.
When refuelling, do not continue after the third cut-off of the nozzle to
avoid any overflow.
At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after the first 1 800 miles
(3 000 kilometres) that you will see the fuel consumption settle down to
a consistent average.
11
Instruments
Instrument panel
Dials and screens Control buttons

1. Fuel gauge. 7. Service indicator, then total distance A. Main lighting dimmer.
2. Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h). recorder (miles or km). B. Reset the trip distance recorder.
3. Engine oil level indicator. These functions are displayed in turn when Instantaneous information on:
4. Gear shift indicator. the ignition is switched on. - servicing,
Gear with an automatic gearbox. 8. Trip distance recorder (miles or km). - remaining driving range with the
5. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h). 9. Rev counter (x 1 000 rpm or tr/min), emissions additive.
6. Cruise control or speed limiter settings. graduation according to engine (petrol or
Diesel).
10. Engine coolant temperature gauge.
12
Instruments
Indicator and warning lamps

Visual indicators informing the driver that a system is in operation or is switched off (indicator lamp), or has a fault (warning lamp).
1
When the ignition is switched on Associated warnings Certain warning lamps may come on in
Certain warning lamps come on for a few The switching on of certain warning lamps one of two modes: fixed (continuous) or
seconds in the instrument panel when the may be accompanied by an audible signal and flashing.
vehicle's ignition is switched on. a message. Only by relating the type of illumination
When the engine is started, these same The warning lamps may come on continuously to the operation of the vehicle can it
warning lamps should go off. (fixed) or flash. be determined whether the situation is
If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the normal or a fault has occurred. In the
information on the warning lamp concerned. event of a fault, the illumination of the
warning lamp may be accompanied by
a message.
Refer to the tables in the following
pages for more information.
13
Instruments
Operation indicator lamps

If one of the following indicator lamps comes on in the instrument panel and/or instrument panel screen, this confirms that the corresponding system has come into operation.
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Left-hand flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk is pushed down.

direction indicator
Right-hand flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk is pushed up.

direction indicator
Sidelamps fixed. The lighting stalk is in the

"Sidelamps" position.
Dipped beam fixed. The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped

headlamps beam headlamps" position.
Main beam fixed. The lighting stalk is pulled towards Pull the stalk to return to dipped beam headlamps.
headlamps you.
Front foglamps fixed. The front foglamps are switched on. Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards twice to switch off
the front foglamps.
For more information on the lighting controls, refer to the corresponding section.
14
Instruments
Warning / indicator lamp
Rear foglamps
State
fixed.
Cause
The rear foglamps are on.

Action / Observations
Turn the ring on the stalk rearward to switch off the

1
rear foglamps.
Diesel engine fixed. The ignition switch is Wait until the warning lamp goes off before starting.
pre-heating at the 2nd position (ignition on) or the Once it goes off, starting is immediate, on condition that:
"START/STOP" button has been - the clutch pedal is pressed fully down with a
pressed. manual gearbox,
- pressure is maintained on the brake pedal with an
automatic gearbox.
The period of illumination of the warning lamp is determined by
the ambient conditions (up to about thirty seconds in extreme
conditions).
If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and then on,
wait until the warning lamp goes off again, then start the engine.
Parking brake fixed. The parking brake is applied or not To switch off the warning lamp: with your foot on the
fully released. brake pedal, release the parking brake.
If your vehicle has an electric parking brake: with your
foot on the brake pedal, push the brake control lever.
Observe the safety recommendations.
For more information on the parking brake, refer to the
corresponding section.
15
Instruments
Automatic fixed. The wiper control is pushed Automatic front wiping is activated.
wiping downwards. To deactivate automatic wiping, operate the control
stalk downwards or put the stalk into another position.
Passenger fixed. The control switch, located at the Turn the control switch to the "OFF" position to
airbag system passenger's end of the dashboard, is in deactivate the passenger's front airbag.
the "ON" position. You can install a rearward facing child seat, unless
The passenger's front airbag is activated. there is a fault with the airbags (airbag warning
In this case, do not install a rearward lamp on).
facing child seat on the front passenger
seat.
Stop & Start fixed. When the vehicle stops (red lights, The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts
traffic jams, ...) the Stop & Start system automatically in START mode, as soon as you want to
has put the engine into STOP mode. move off.
flashes for a few STOP mode is temporarily For more information on Stop & Start, refer to the
seconds, then goes unavailable. corresponding section.
off. or
START mode is invoked
automatically.
Blind spot sensors fixed. The blind spot monitoring function For more information on the blind spot sensor system,
(depending on has been activated. refer to the corresponding section.
version)
16
Instruments
Deactivation indicator lamps

If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.
1
This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message.
Passenger's fixed in the seat belt The control switch, located on the To activate the front passenger's airbag, set the switch
front airbag and front passenger's passenger's end of the dashboard, is to the "ON" position; in this case, you must not install
airbag warning lamps set to the "OFF" position. a child seat in the rearward facing position on this
display. The passenger's front airbag is seat.
deactivated.
You can install a rearward facing
child seat, unless there is a fault with
the airbags (airbag warning lamp on).
Dynamic fixed. The button is pressed and the Press the button to activate the DSC/ASR. Its
stability control indicator lamp comes on. indicator lamp goes off.
(DSC/ASR) The DSC/ASR is deactivated. The DSC/ASR system is activated automatically when
DSC: dynamic stability control. the vehicle is started.
ASR: anti-slip regulation. If deactivated, the system is reactivated automatically
from around 30 mph (50 km/h).
For more information on the ESC system (DSC/ASR),
refer to the corresponding section.
17
Instruments
Warning lamps
When the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven, illumination of one of the following warning lamps indicates a fault which requires action on
the part of the driver.
Any fault resulting in the illumination of a warning lamp must be investigated further using the associated message.
If you encounter any problems, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
STOP fixed, associated with Illumination of this warning lamp is Stop as soon as it is safe to do so as the engine may
another warning lamp, related to a serious fault detected cut out.
accompanied by an with the braking or power steering Park, switch off the ignition and call a PEUGEOT
audible signal and a systems, the electrical system, or dealer or a qualified workshop.
message. with engine lubrication or cooling or
a puncture.
18
Instruments
Service
State
on temporarily.
Cause
A minor fault has occurred for which

Identify the fault by means of the associated

1
there is no specific warning lamp. message, such as:
- low engine oil level,
- low screenwash/headlamp wash fluid level,
- discharged remote control battery,
- low tyre pressures,
- saturation of the particle filter (FAP) on Diesel
vehicles.
For more information on checking the particle filter,
For any other faults, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
fixed. A major fault has occurred for which Identify the fault by reading the message and contact
there is no specific warning lamp. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed, associated with The servicing interval has been Only on BlueHDi Diesel versions.
flashing and then fixed exceeded. Your vehicle must be serviced as soon as possible.
display of the service
spanner.
19
Instruments
Electric parking flashing. The electric parking brake is not You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
brake applied automatically. Park on flat level ground, engage a gear (or place the
The application/release is faulty. lever in position P for an automatic gearbox), switch
off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Electric parking fixed. The electric parking brake has a fault. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
brake fault without delay.
For more information on the electric parking brake,
Deactivation of fixed. The "automatic application" To reactivate the automatic functions, refer to the
the automatic (on switching off the engine) and "Electric parking brake" section.
functions of the "automatic release" functions are Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop if
electric parking deactivated or faulty. automatic application / release is not possible.
brake In the event of a fault, illumination of The parking brake can be released manually.
this warning lamp is accompanied by For more information on the electric parking brake,
a message. refer to the corresponding section.
20
Instruments
Braking
State
fixed.
Cause
The brake fluid level has dropped

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

1
significantly. Top up with brake fluid listed by PEUGEOT.
If the problem persists, have the system checked by a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
+ fixed, associated The electronic brake force distribution You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
with the ABS warning (EBFD) system has a fault. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
lamp. workshop.
Anti-lock fixed. The anti-lock braking system has a The vehicle retains conventional braking.
Braking System fault. Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a
(ABS) PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without
delay.
Dynamic flashing. The DSC/ASR regulation is The system optimises traction and improves the
stability control operating. directional stability of the vehicle in the event of loss of
(DSC/ASR) grip or trajectory.
fixed. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
21
Instruments
Engine flashing. The engine management system has Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter.
autodiagnosis a fault. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
system workshop.
fixed. The emission control system has a The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.
fault. If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified
workshop without delay.
Emergency flashing. The Emergency Collision Braking The system brakes briefly so as to reduce the speed
Collision System is active. of collision with the vehicle ahead.
Braking System
fixed, The Emergency Collision Braking Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
accompanied by System has a fault. workshop.
a mesage and an
audible signal
fixed. The Emergency Collision Braking System

has been deactivated (via the menu).
Low fuel level fixed, with the needle When it first comes on there remains You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running
in the red zone. less than 10 litres of fuel in the out of fuel.
tank. This warning lamp will come on every time the ignition
is switched on, until a sufficient addition of fuel is
made.
Fuel tank capacity: approximately 53 litres or 45 litres
depending on version.
Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel as
this could damage the emission control and injection
systems.
22
Instruments
Seat belt(s)
State
fixed
Cause
A seat belt has not been fastened or

Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.

1
not fastened / or flashing has been unfastened.
unfastened accompanied by an
audible signal.
Airbags on temporarily. This lamp comes on for a few This lamp should go off when the engine is started.
seconds when you turn on the If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
ignition, then goes off. qualified workshop.
fixed. One of the airbag or seat belt Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
pretensioner systems has a fault. workshop.
Battery charge* fixed. The battery charging circuit has a The warning lamp should go off when the engine is
fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or started.
cut alternator belt, ...). If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
* Depending on the country of sale.

23
Instruments
Engine oil fixed. There is a fault with the engine You must stop as soon it is safe to do so.
pressure lubrication system. Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Deflated tyre fixed. The pressure in one or more tyres is Check the pressures of the tyres as soon as possible.
too low. This check should preferably carried out with the tyres
cold.
flashing then fixed. The under-inflation detection system Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
has a fault. workshop.
For more information on under-inflation detection,
Foot on the fixed. The brake pedal must be pressed. With an automatic gearbox, press the brake pedal,
brake pedal engine running, before releasing the parking brake, to
unlock the lever and come out of position P.
If you wish to release the parking brake without
pressing the brake pedal, this warning lamp will
remain on.
Foot on the fixed. In the STOP mode of Stop & Start, You must declutch fully to allow the change to engine
clutch changing to START mode is refused START mode.
because the clutch pedal is not fully
down.
24
Instruments
Warning or indicator lamp

in the instrument panel
State Cause Action / Observations
1
Door(s) open fixed, associated with A door or the boot is still open. Close the door or boot.
a message identifying
the door, if the speed is
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
fixed, associated with a

message identifying the
door, and accompanied
by an audible signal
if the speed is above
6 mph (10 km/h).
25
Instruments

AdBlue ® additive fixed, on switching The remaining driving range is Have the AdBlue ® additive tank topped up as soon
(BlueHDi Diesel) on the ignition, between 350 miles (600 km) and as possible: go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
accompanied by an 1500 miles (2400 km). workshop, or carry out this operation yourself.
audible signal and a
message indicating the
remaining driving range.
+ flashing associated with The remaining driving range is You must top-up the AdBlue ® additive tank to avoid
the SERVICE warning between 0 and 350 miles (600 km). a breakdown: go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
lamp, accompanied by workshop, or carry out this operation yourself.
an audible signal and a
flashing, associated The AdBlue ® tank is empty: the To be able to start the engine, you must top-up the
with the SERVICE starting inhibition system required AdBlue ® additive tank: go to a PEUGEOT dealer
warning lamp, by legislation prevents starting of the or a qualified workshop, or carry out this operation
accompanied by an engine. yourself.
audible signal and a It is essential to add at least 3.8 litres of AdBlue ® to
message indicating that the additive tank.
starting is prevented.
For topping-up or for more information on the AdBlue ® additive, refer to the corresponding section.
26
Instruments

1
SCR emissions fixed, on switching on A fault with the SCR emissions This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions
control system the ignition, associated control system has been detected. return to normal levels.
+ (BlueHDi Diesel) with the SERVICE and
engine diagnostic warning
lamps, accompanied by
+ an audible signal and a
message.
flashing, on switching on After confirmation of the fault with the Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
the ignition, associated emissions control system, you can workshop without delay, to avoid a breakdown.
with the SERVICE and drive for up to 650 miles (1 100 km)
engine diagnostic warning before the engine starting inhibition
lamps, accompanied by system is triggered.
an audible signal and a
flashing, on switching on You have exceeded the authorised To be able to start the engine, you must call on a
the ignition, associated driving limit following confirmation PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
with the SERVICE and of a fault with the emissions
engine diagnostic warning control system: the engine starting
lamps, accompanied by inhibition system prevents starting of
an audible signal and a the engine.
message.
27
Instruments
Gauges and indicators

Coolant temperature gauge Service indicator
After driving for a few minutes, the temperature System which informs the driver when the
and pressure in the cooling system increase. next service is due, in accordance with the
To top up the level: manufacturer's servicing schedule.
F wait for the engine to cool,
F unscrew the cap slightly to allow the
pressure to drop, The point at which the next service is due is
F when the pressure has dropped, remove calculated from the last indicator zero reset,
the cap, depending on the distance travelled and the
F top up the level to the "MAX" mark. time elapsed since the last service.
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, the degree of

deterioration of the engine oil is also taken into
With the engine running, when the needle is: account (depending on the country of sale).
Be aware of the risk of burns when
- in zone A, the temperature is correct,
topping up the cooling system. Do not
- in zone B, the temperature is too high;
fill above the maximum level (indicated
the maximum temperature and the
on the header tank).
central STOP warning lamps come on,
accompanied by an audible signal and a
warning message in the screen.
You MUST stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Wait a few minutes before switching off
the engine.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km)

remain before the next service is due
When the ignition is switched on, no service
information appears in the screen.
28
Instruments
1
Between 600 miles (1 000 km) Less than 600 miles (1 000 km) Service overdue
and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain remain before the next service is due
before the next service is due Example: 560 miles (900 km) remain before For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the the next service is due. the spanner flashes to indicate that the service
spanner symbolising the service operations comes For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, must be carried out as soon as possible.
on. The distance recorder display line indicates the the screen indicates: Example: the service is overdue by 180 miles
distance remaining before the next service is due. (300 km).
Example: 1 700 miles (2 800 km) remain before For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the next service is due. the screen indicates:
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the
screen indicates:
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,

the distance recorder resumes its normal
operation. The spanner remains on to
indicate that a service must be carried out 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
soon. the distance recorder resumes its normal
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, operation. The spanner remains on.
the spanner goes off; the distance recorder
resumes its normal operation. The screen then For BlueHDi Diesel versions, this alert may
indicates the total distance. also be accompanied by the fixed illumination
of the service warning lamp when the ignition
is on.
29
Instruments
Service indicator zero reset Retrieving the service

information
You can access the service information at any
The distance remaining may be time.
weighted by the time factor, depending F Press the trip distance recorder zero reset
on the driving conditions. button.
Therefore, the spanner may also come The service information is displayed for a
on if you have exceeded the period few seconds, then disappears.
since the last service, indicated in the
manufacturer's service schedule.
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, the
spanner may also be brought on earlier
After each service, the service indicator must
than expected, depending on the
be reset to zero.
degree of deterioration of the engine oil
If you have carried out the service on your
(depending on the country of sale).
vehicle yourself:
The rate of deterioration of the engine
F switch off the ignition,
oil depends on the driving conditions in
F press and hold the trip distance recorder
which the vehicle is used.
zero reset button,
F switch on the ignition; the distance recorder
display begins a countdown,
F when the display indicates "=0", release
the button; the spanner disappears.
Following this operation, if you wish to

disconnect the battery, lock the vehicle
and wait at least five minutes for the
zero reset to be registered.
30
Instruments
Engine oil level indicator

1
On versions fitted with an electric oil gauge, Dipstick
information on the oil level is displayed in the
instrument panel for a few seconds when the Refer to the petrol or Diesel engine
ignition is switched on, at the same time as the section to locate the dipstick and the oil
service information. filler cap on your engine.
Oil level incorrect
This is indicated by a message in the
The level read will only be correct if instrument panel.
the vehicle is on level ground and the If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using
There are 2 marks on the
engine has been off for more than the dipstick, the level must be topped up to
dipstick:
30 minutes. avoid damage to the engine.
- A = max; never exceed this
level,
- B = min; top up the level via
the oil filler, using the grade
of oil suited to your engine.
Oil level correct Oil level indicator fault

This is indicated by a message in the This is indicated by a message in the
instrument panel. instrument panel. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop.
31
Instruments
Distance recorders
The total and trip distances are displayed for
thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off,
when the driver's door is opened and when the
vehicle is locked or unlocked.
When travelling abroad, you may

have to change the units of distance:
the display of road speed must be in
the official units (miles or km) for the
country. The change of units is done via
the screen configuration menu, with the Total distance recorder Trip distance recorder
vehicle stationary. It measures the total distance travelled by the It measures the distance travelled since it was
vehicle since its first registration. reset to zero by the driver.
F With the ignition on, press the button until
zeros appear.
32
Instruments
Lighting dimmer control

1
For the manual adjustment of the brightness of
the instrument panel and the touch screen.
Operates only when the vehicle's

exterior lighting is on.
Touch screen
F Press on the "Configuration" menu.
F Adjust the brightness (only on the touch
screen) by pressing on the "+" or "-" buttons.
Instrument panel
With the exterior lighting on, press this button
to adjust the brightness of the dashboard
lighting, the touch screen and the mood
lighting. As soon as the lighting reaches the
required level of brightness, release the button.
33
Instruments
Trip computer
System that gives you information on the current journey (range, fuel consumption…).
Depending on version
Instrument panel screen Trip reset
- The current information tab with:
● the range,
● the current fuel consumption,
● the Stop & Start time counter.
- Trip "1" with:

● the average speed.
● the average fuel consumption,
Information display ● the distance travelled,
for the first trip.
F When the trip required is displayed, press
the control for more than two seconds
- Trip "2" with: or use the left hand thumb wheel of the
● the average speed, steering mounted controls.
● the average fuel consumption, Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use
● the distance travelled, is identical.
for the second trip. For example, trip "1" can be used for daily
figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.
F Press the button on the end of the wiper

control stalk to display the various tabs in
succession.
34
Instruments
Trip computer
Touch screen
1
System that gives you information on the current journey (range, fuel consumption…).
The information is accessible in the "Driving assistance" menu.
Information display in the Trip reset

touch screen
The current fuel consumption tab
with:
- the range,
- the current fuel consumption,
- the Stop & Start time counter.
The trip "1" tab with:

- the distance travelled.
- the average fuel consumption,
Permanent display: - the average speed,
F When the desired trip is displayed, press
F Select the "Driving assistance" menu. for the first trip.
the reset button or on the end of the wiper
The trip computer information is displayed in
control stalk.
the primary page of the menu.
The trip "2" tab with: Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use
F Press one of the buttons to display the
- the distance travelled. is identical.
desired tab.
- the average fuel consumption, For example, trip "1" can be used for daily
- the average speed, figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.
Temporary display in a new window:
F Press the end of the wiper control stalk for for the second trip.
access to the information and display the
different tabs.
35
Instruments
Trip computer, a few definitions

Range Current fuel consumption Distance travelled
(miles or km) (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) (miles or km)
The distance which can still be Calculated over the last few seconds. Calculated since the last trip
travelled with the fuel remaining in computer reset.
the tank (related to the average fuel
consumption over the last few miles
(kilometres) travelled).
This function is only displayed from Stop & Start time
20 mph (30 km/h). counter
(minutes / seconds or
This value may vary following a change hours / minutes)
in the style of driving or the relief, Average fuel consumption If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, a time
resulting in a significant change in the counter calculates the time spent in STOP mode
current fuel consumption. (mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
during a journey.
Calculated since the last trip
It resets to zero every time the ignition is
computer reset.
switched on.
When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km),
dashes are displayed. After filling with at least Average speed
5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is
(mph or km/h)
displayed when it exceeds 60 miles (100 km).
Calculated since the last trip
computer reset.
If dashes are displayed continuously

while driving in place of the digits,
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
36
Instruments
Touch screen
It gives access to: General operation
1
- the heating/air conditioning controls,
- menus for adjusting settings for vehicle Recommendations State of indicator lamps
functions and systems, It is necessary to press firmly, particularly for Some buttons contain an indicator lamp that
- audio and display configuration menus, "flick" gestures (scrolling through lists, moving gives the state of the corresponding function.
- audio system and telephone controls and the map...). Green indicator: you have switched on the
the display of associated information. A light wipe is not enough. corresponding function.
The screen does not recognise pressing with Orange indicator: you have switched off the
more than one finger. corresponding function.
This technology allows use at all temperatures
And, depending on equipment, it allows: and when wearing gloves.
- the display of alert messages and the Do not use pointed objects on the touch
visual parking sensors information, screen.
- access to the controls for the navigation Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands.
system and Internet services, and the Uses a soft clean cloth to clean the touch
display of associated information. screen.
For reasons of safety, the driver

should only carry out operations
that require close attention, with the
vehicle stationary.
Some functions are not accessible
when driving.
37
Instruments
Touch screen menus

Principles
Use the buttons on either side of the touch
screen for access to the menus, then press the
virtual buttons in the touch screen.
Each menu is displayed over one or two pages
(primary page and secondary page).
Use this button to go to the

secondary page.
Use this button to return to the Air conditioning. Configuration.

primary page. Allows adjustment of the various Allows configuration of the display
settings for temperature, air flow... and the system.
See the sections on "Heating",
After a few moments with no action on Connected services.
"Manual air conditioning" and "Digital
the secondary page, the primary page These services can be not available, an option or
air conditioning".
is displayed automatically. standard.
Driving assistance. See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.
Use this button for access to Allows certain functions to be switched
on and off and their settings adjusted. Telephone.
additional information and to the
See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.
settings for certain functions.
Media.
See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.
Use this button to confirm.
Navigation.
Depending on trim level, navigation can
Use this button to quit. be not available, an option or standard.
See the "Audio equipment and 1. Volume / mute.
telematics" section. See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.
38
Instruments
1
"Driving assistance" menu
The systems with settings that can be adjusted are detailed in the table below.
Button Corresponding function Comments
Speed settings Memorisation of speeds for use with the speed limiter or cruise control.
Under-inflation initialisation Reinitialisation of the under-inflation system.
Blind spot sensors Activation of the function.
39
Instruments
Vehicle settings Access to other functions with settings that can be adjusted.
Select or deselect the tabs at the bottom of the screen to display the functions required.
- "Driving assistance"
- "[Automatic rear wiper in reverse]" (activation of rear wiper coupled to reverse gear).
For more information on the wiper control stalk, refer to the corresponding section.
- "[Collision risk alert]" (activation of the collision risk alert system).
For more information on Collision Risk Alert, refer to the corresponding section.
- "[Lighting]"
- "[Guide-me-home lighting]" (automatic guide me home lighting),
- "[Welcome lighting]" (exterior welcome lighting).
For more information on the lighting control stalk, refer to the corresponding section.
- "[Mood lighting]" (interior mood lighting).
For more information on mood lighting, refer to the corresponding section.
- "Vehicle access"
- "[Driver plip action]" (selective unlocking of the driver's door).
For more information on the remote control or Keyless Entry and Starting, refer to the corresponding
section.
- "[Unlocking boot]" (selective unlocking of the boot).
For more information on the boot, refer to the corresponding section.
Diagnostic List of current alerts.
Parking sensors Activation/Deactivation of the function.
Active cruise control Choice of the standard cruise control or the active cruise control.
The choice of active cruise control is retained on condition that the steering mounted control thumb
wheel is on the "CRUISE" position.
40
Instruments
1
State of adjustable systems
Some systems have a dedicated button, to Example:
which is associated an indicator lamp. ● Function not activated.
Illumination of this lamp indicates whether the
system is activated or deactivated compared to
the default (factory) setting.
Green indicator: you have switched on the
corresponding system. ● Operating fault alert.
Orange indicator: you have switched off the
corresponding system.
then
Operating fault
In the event of a fault with one of these
systems, the indicator lamp in the activation/
deactivation button flashes for a few moments.
An alert symbol is displayed to the right of the
button symbol, then, in the case of systems that
are activated by default, the orange indicator
comes on permanently.
Every time the button is pressed, the indicator
flashes for a few moments.
41
Instruments
"Configuration" menu
The functions available through this menu are detailed in the table below.
Audio settings Adjustment of volume, balance...
Color schemes Choice of color scheme.
Interactive help Access to the interactive user guide.
Turn off screen
Brightness
42
Instruments
1
System Settings Choice of units:

- temperature (°Celsius or °Fahrenheit)
- distance and fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
Time/Date Setting the date and time.
Languages Choice of language used: French, English, Italian, Spanish, German, Dutch, Portuguese,
Polish, Turkish, Russian.
Screen settings Adjustment of the display settings (scrolling of text, animations...).
Calculator
Calendar
43
Instruments
Setting the date and time

Touch screen
This function is accessible in the touch screen. F In the secondary page, press on "Time/ F Select "Adjust time" or "Adjust date"
Date". and modify the settings using the number
F Select the "Configuration" keypad, then confirm.
menu.
F Press "Confirm" to quit.
44
Instruments
Screen C
1
F Press the "7" or "8" button to select the F Press the "5" or "6" button to select the
Personalisation-configuration menu, Display configuration menu then confirm
then confirm by pressing the "OK" button. by pressing the the "OK" button.
F Press the "5" or "6" and "7" or "8" buttons

to set the date and time, then confirm by
pressing the "OK" button.
For more information on the

Multimedia menu, refer to the "Audio
and telematics" section.
F Press the MENU button for access to the
main menu.
45
Instruments
Screen A
You have access to the following settings:
- year,
- month,
- day,
- hour,
- minutes,
- 12 or 24 hour mode.
F Once you have selected a setting, press F Press the "5" or "6" buttons to switch
the "7" or "8" buttons to change its value. respectively to the previous or next setting.
F Press the "MENU" button to gain access

to the main menu, then press the "5"
or "6" buttons to go to the Display F Press the "OK" button to register the
settings menu. change and return to the normal display or
F Press the "OK" button to select the menu press the "<]" button to cancel.
required.
46
Instruments
Screen A (without audio system)

1
F Once you have selected a setting using

the "5" or "6" buttons, press the "OK"
button to change its value.
F Wait for approximately ten seconds without
any action to allow the change to be
registered or press the "ESC" button to
cancel.
The screen then returns to the normal display.
47
Access
Remote control key

System for the central locking or unlocking Complete unlocking
of the vehicle using the door lock or from a
distance.
It is also used to locate and start the vehicle, as
well as providing protection against theft.
Using the key Using the remote control

F Turn the key to the front of the vehicle to F Press the open padlock to unlock
unlock the vehicle. the vehicle.
If your vehicle has an alarm, this is not
deactivated. Opening a door will trigger the
alarm, which can then be stopped by switching Unlocking is confirmed by rapid
Unfolding / Folding the key the ignition on. flashing of the direction indicators for
F Press this button to unfold or fold the key. approximately two seconds.
According to version, the door mirrors
unfold at the same time.
If you do not press the button, you risk

damaging the remote control.
48
Access
2
Selective unlocking Normal locking
Complete unlocking is activated by default.
Locking is confirmed by fixed
This is set in the "Driving assistance" menu,
lighting of the direction indicators for
then "Vehicle settings" and "Vehicle access".
approximately two seconds.
fold at the same time.
Use this button for access to
additional information.
Driving with the doors locked may

Using the remote control Using the key render access for the emergency
services difficult in an emergency.
F To unlock the driver's door only, F Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle
As a safety measure (children on
press the open padlock once. to lock the vehicle completely.
board), never leave the vehicle without
If your vehicle has an alarm, this will not be
taking your key, even for a short period.
activated.
F To unlock the other doors and the boot,

press the open padlock again.
Using the remote control
F Press the closed padlock to lock When a door or the boot is not
the vehicle completely. fully closed, engine running or
Unlocking is confirmed by rapid vehicle moving (speed above 6 mph
flashing of the direction indicators for (10 km/h)), a message appears for a
Maintaining the locking action (key or remote
approximately two seconds. few seconds.
control) automatically closes the windows.
unfold at the same time as the first
unlocking action.
49
Access
Deadlocking
If one of the doors or the boot is still Deadlocking renders the exterior and Using the remote control
open or if an electronic key has been interior door controls inoperative. F Press the closed padlock to lock
left inside the vehicle, the central It also deactivates the manual central the vehicle completely.
locking does not take place. control button.
When the vehicle is locked, if it is Therefore, never leave anyone inside
unlocked inadvertently, it will relock the vehicle when it is deadlocked. F Press the closed padlock again within
automatically after about thirty seconds five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
unless a door is opened.
And if your vehicle has an alarm, this

will not be reactivated. Deadlocking is confirmed by fixed
The folding and unfolding of the door lighting of the direction indicators for
mirrors by the remote control can be approximately two seconds.
deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a Depending on version, the door mirrors
qualified workshop. fold at the same time.
Using the key

F Turn the key to the rear in the driver's door
lock to lock the vehicle completely.
F Turn the key to the rear again within
five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
50
Access
2
Locating your vehicle Anti-theft protection
This function allows you to identify your vehicle Electronic engine immobiliser
from a distance, particularly in poor light. Your
The key contains an electronic chip which has
vehicle must be locked.
a special code. When the ignition is switched
on, this code must be recognised in order for
F Press the closed padlock on the
starting to be possible.
remote control.
This electronic engine immobiliser locks the
engine management system a few moments
This will switch on the courtesy lamps and after the ignition is switched off and prevents
the direction indicators will flash for around starting of the engine by anyone who does not
ten seconds. have the key.
Remote operation of lighting In the event of a fault, you are

informed by illumination of this
A short press this button switches warning lamp, an audible signal and
on the lighting remotely (sidelamps, a message in the screen.
dipped beam headlamps and number
plate lamps). In this case, your vehicle will not start; contact
a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible.
A second press before the end of the timed

period cancels the remote lighting.
Keep safely, away from your vehicle,
the label attached to the keys given to
you on acquisition of the vehicle.
51
Access
Back-up control
For mechanically locking and unlocking the
doors in the event of a fault with the central
locking system or a battery failure.
Driver's door Passenger doors If your vehicle has an alarm, it will not
F Insert the key in the lock to lock or unlock F On the rear doors, check that the child lock be activated and deactivated on locking
the door. is not on. and unlocking the vehicle.
If your vehicle has an alarm, it will not be F Insert the integral key into the latch on the Opening a door will trigger the alarm,
activated and deactivated on locking and edge of the door and turn it an eighth of a which can be stopped by switching on
unlocking the vehicle. turn to the right, for the right hand side and the ignition.
Opening a door will trigger the alarm, which to the left for the left hand side.
can be stopped by switching on the ignition. F Close the doors and check from the
outside that they have locked correctly.
52
Access
2
Remote control problem
Following disconnection of the vehicle battery,
replacement of the remote control battery or
in the event of a remote control malfunction,
you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your
vehicle.
F First of all, use the key in the lock to unlock
or lock your vehicle.
F Then, reinitialise the remote control.
If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer as soon as possible.
Changing the battery

Battery ref.: CR1620 / 3 volts.
If the battery is flat, you are
informed by lighting of this warning
lamp in the instrument panel, an audible signal
and a message in the screen.
F Unclip the cover using a screwdriver in the
Reinitialisation cutout.
F Switch off the ignition. F Remove the cover.
F Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition). F Extract the flat battery from its location.
F Place the new battery into its location
F Press the closed padlock observing the original direction.
immediately for a few seconds. F Clip the cover in place.
Do not throw the remote control

F Switch off the ignition and remove the key batteries away, they contain metals
from the ignition switch. which are harmful to the environment.
The remote control is fully operational again. Take them to an approved collection
point.
53
Access
"Keyless Entry and Starting" with remote

control Locking
F Press the closed padlock to lock
System for the central locking or unlocking Selective unlocking the vehicle completely.
of the vehicle using the door lock or from a Hold the button down until the
distance. Complete unlocking is activated by default. windows close completely.
It is also used to locate and start the vehicle, as This setting is done in the "Driving
well as providing protection against theft. assistance" menu, then "Vehicle settings"
and "Vehicle access".
Locking is confirmed by fixed lighting of
the direction indicators for a few seconds.
Depending on your version, the door
mirrors fold, the alarm is activated.
F To unlock only the driver's door,
press the open padlock once.
F To unlock the other doors and the boot, Driving with the doors locked may make
press the open padlock again. access to the passenger compartment
by the emergency services difficult in
Complete unlocking the event of an emergency.
Be aware of children when operating
F Press the open padlock to unlock Unlocking is confirmed by rapid the windows.
the vehicle. flashing of the direction indicators for
two seconds.
At the same time, depending on If a door or the boot is not properly
version, the door mirrors unfold. And closed, with the engine running
if your vehicle has an alarm, it is or the vehicle moving (speed
deactivated above 6 mph (10 km/h)), a message
appears for a few seconds.
54
Access
Locating your vehicle

This function allows you to identify
your vehicle from a distance,
2
particularly in poor light. Your vehicle
must be locked.
F Press the closed padlock on the remote
control.
This will switch on the courtesy lamps and
the direction indicators will flash for around
ten seconds.
As a safety measure (children on

board), never leave the vehicle without
taking the key for the Keyless Entry
and Starting system, even for a short
period.
Guard against theft when the key for
the Keyless Entry and Starting system
is in the recognition zone with the
vehicle unlocked.
In order to preserve the charge of the
cell battery in the remote control, the
"hands-free" functions go into extended
stand-by after 21 days of non-use. To
restore these functions, press one of
the remote control buttons or start the
engine with the electronic key in the
reader.
55
Access
"Keyless Entry and Starting" on your person

System for unlocking, locking and starting the
vehicle while keeping the electronic key on your
Complete unlocking Selective unlocking
person. When selective unlocking of the driver's door is
activated.
F With the electronic key in the driver's door
zone, pass your hand behind the driver's
The central locking does not take place:
door handle to unlock just the driver's door,
- if the ignition is on,
then pull on the door handle to open the
- if one of the doors or the boot is still
door.
open,
F With the electronic key in the passenger's
- if the key for the Keyless Entry and
door zone, pass your hand behind the
Starting system has been left inside
passenger's door handle to unlock the
the vehicle.
whole vehicle, then pull on the door handle
When the vehicle is locked, if it is
to open the door.
unlocked inadvertently, it will lock itself F With the electronic key on your person and
again automatically after about thirty in the recognition zone A, pass your hand
seconds unless a door is opened. behind one of the front door handles to By default, complete unlocking is activated.
And if your vehicle has an alarm, this is unlock the vehicle, then pull on the handle This setting is done in the "Driving
not reactivated. to open the door. assistance" menu, then "Vehicle settings"
The folding and unfolding of the door and "Vehicle access".
mirrors by the remote control can be
deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Unlocking is confirmed by rapid

flashing of the direction indicators for a
few seconds.
Depending on version, the door mirrors
unfold, the alarm is deactivated.
56
Access
Locking
For reasons of safety and theft
protection, do not leave your electronic
2
key in the vehicle, even when you are
close to it.
It is recommended that you keep it on

your person.
F With the electronic key in the recognition F With the key in the recognition zone A, Ensure that no one prevents the correct
zone A, press with a finger on one of the press the tailgate locking control to lock operation of the windows.
front door handles (at the markings) to lock the vehicle. Be aware of children when operating
the vehicle. the windows.
Maintain pressure with your finger until the
windows close completely.
If a door or the boot is not properly

closed, with the engine running Locking is confirmed by fixed lighting of
or the vehicle moving (speed the direction indicators for a few seconds.
above 6 mph (10 km/h)), a message Depending on your version, the door
appears for a few seconds. mirrors fold, the alarm is activated.
57
Access
Deadlocking
Deadlocking renders the exterior and
interior door controls inoperative.
It also deactivates the manual central
control button.
Therefore, never leave anyone inside
the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
Using the remote control With the Keyless Entry and Starting system
F Press the closed padlock to lock By the doors: By the boot:
the vehicle completely. F With the electronic key in the recognition F With the electronic key in the recognition
Maintain pressure with your zone A, press a finger on the door handle zone A, press the boot locking control to
finger for more than two seconds (at the markings) to lock the vehicle. lock the vehicle.
to close the windows. F Within five seconds, press the door handle F Within five seconds, press the boot locking
F Press the closed padlock again within again to deadlock the vehicle. control again to deadlock the vehicle.
five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
Ensure that no one is preventing the Accumulations (water, dust, grime, salt...) on the inner surface if the door handle may affect
correct closing of the windows. detection.
Be aware of children when operating If cleaning the inner surface of the door handle using a cloth does not restore detection,
the windows. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
A sudden splash of water (stream of water, high pressure jet washer, …) may be identified
by the system as the desire to open the vehicle.
58
Access
Boot
2
Opening using the key Opening using the "Keyless Opening using the Keyless
Entry and Starting" remote Entry and Starting system
control
Complete unlocking
F Press this button, the vehicle is
unlocked.
F Press the opening control, then open the

boot.
F After unlocking the vehicle with
the remote control, press the
opening control and then open
the boot.
Selective unlocking
Complete unlocking is selected by default.
This setting is done in the "Driving Complete unlocking
assistance" menu, then "Vehicle settings" F With the electronic key on your person in
and "Vehicle access". the recognition zone A, press the opening
control then raise the tailgate.
F Press this button, the boot is
unlocked.
F Press the opening control, then raise the

Selective unlocking
tailgate.
By default, complete unlocking is activated.
Use this button for access to This setting is done in the "Driving
additional information. assistance" menu, then "Vehicle settings"
and "Vehicle access".
59
Access
When unlocking of the boot only is activated: Locking with Keyless Entry Tailgate release
F With the electronic key in the recognition
zone A, press the boot unlocking control
and Starting System allowing the mechanical unlocking
to unlock just the tailgate, then raise the of the boot in the event of a battery or central
tailgate. locking system malfunction.
Unlocking is signalled by rapid flashing of the
direction indicators for a few seconds.

Closing F With the electronic key in the recognition Unlocking

zone A, press the boot locking control to
F Lower the tailgate using one of the interior F Fold back the rear seats to gain access to
lock the vehicle.
grab handles. the lock from inside the boot.
Locking is signalled by rapid flashing of the
If the boot is not closed correctly (the lock has F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the
direction indicators for a few seconds.
two positions): with the engine running or lock to unlock the tailgate.
when moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), F Move the latch to the right.
a message appears for a few seconds.
Locking after closing

If the fault persists after closing again, the boot
will remain locked.
60
Access
Back-up key
2
Unlocking/locking using the
integral key with Keyless
Entry and Starting
Locking the driver's door Locking the passenger doors

F Insert the integral key in the door lock, then F Open the doors.
turn it to the rear. F For the rear doors, check that the child lock
is not on.
The integral key is used to lock and unlock the
F Insert the integral key in the latch located
vehicle when the electronic key cannot operate:
on the edge of the door and turn it an
- cell battery flat, vehicle battery discharged Unlocking the driver's door
eighth of a turn to the right for the right
or disconnected, ... F Insert the integral key in the door lock, then hand door, and to the the left for the left
- vehicle located in an area with strong turn it to the front. hand door.
electromagnetic signals.
F Close the doors and check that the vehicle
F Maintain a pull on button 1, to extract the
has locked correctly from the outside.
integral key 2.
For more information on the child lock,
refer to the corresponding section. Unlocking the passenger doors
F Pull the interior door opening control.
If the alarm is activated, the audible
signal on opening a door with the key
(integral with the remote control) will
stop when the ignition is switched on.
61
Access
Changing the cell battery Remote control problem -

reinitialisation
Following disconnection of the vehicle battery,
replacement of the remote control battery or
in the event of a remote control malfunction,
you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your
vehicle.
Battery ref.: CR2032 / 3 volts.

This replacement battery is available from a
A message appears in the instrument panel
screen when replacement of the battery is
needed.
F Unclip the cover using a small screwdriver
at the cutout.
F Lift off the cover.
F Place the mechanical key (integral with the
F Remove the flat battery from its location.
remote control) in the lock to unlock your
F Fit the new battery into its location
vehicle.
observing the original direction of fitment.
F Remove the mat under 12 V socket.
F Clip the cover onto the casing.
F Place the electronic key in the housing
provided.
F Switch on the ignition by pressing START/
Do not throw the remote control STOP.
batteries away, they contain metals The electronic key is fully operational again.
which are harmful to the environment.
Take them to an approved collection If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT dealer
point. or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
62
Access
Lost keys, remote control, electronic key
2
Visit a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's registration certificate, your personal identification documents and if possible, the label bearing the
key code.
The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to retrieve the key code and the transponder code required to order a new key
Remote control
The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the
vehicle, without you being aware of it.
Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from
working and the remote control would have to be reinitialised.
The remote control does not operate when the key is in the ignition, even when the ignition is switched off.
Locking the vehicle

Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more difficult in an emergency.
As a safety precaution (with children on board), remove the key from the ignition or take the electronic key when you leave the vehicle, even for
a short time.
Electrical interference
The Keyless Entry and Starting electronic key may not operate if close to certain electronic devices: telephone, laptop computer, strong
magnetic fields, ...
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this could cause malfunctions.
Don't forget to turn the steering to engage the steering lock.
When purchasing a second-hand vehicle

Have the key codes memorised by a PEUGEOT dealer, to ensure that the keys in your possession are the only ones which can start the vehicle.
63
Access
Locking/ unlocking from the inside

Automatic central locking of the Driving with the doors locked may make
doors access to the passenger compartment
The doors can lock automatically while driving by the emergency services more
(speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)). difficult in an emergency.
To activate or deactivate this

function, press and hold the button
If the vehicle is deadlocked or locked
until a message appears in the
with the remote control or the door
screen.
handles, the button is not active. In this
case, use the key or the remote control
to unlock.
After unlocking, if no door is opened
within 30 seconds, the doors lock again
automatically.
F Press the button.

When carrying large objects with the
This allows the doors and the boot to be locked
boot open, you can press this button to
or unlocked.
lock just the doors.
When locking from inside, the door
mirrors do not fold.
64
Access
Alarm
2
Exterior perimeter Self-protection function
The system checks for opening of the vehicle. The system checks for the
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a disconnection of any of its components.
door, the boot or the bonnet... The alarm is triggered if the battery,
the button or the wires of the siren are
disconnected or damaged.
Interior volumetric
The system checks for any variation in the For all work on the alarm system,
volume in the passenger compartment. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a qualified workshop.
window, enters the passenger compartment or
System which protects and provides a deterrent
moves inside the vehicle.
against theft and break-ins.
It provides the following types of monitoring:
For vehicles fitted with the system, the
volumetric monitoring is not compatible
with programmed temperature
pre-conditioning.
Tilt*
The system checks for movement of the vehicle
on the ground.
The alarm is triggered if the vehicle is lifted,
moved or damaged.
* On GT and GTi versions.

65
Access
Total protection Protection - exterior

perimeter monitoring only
Activation Deactivation Deactivate the interior volumetric monitoring
F Switch off the ignition and get out of the vehicle. F Press this unlocking button on (and tilt monitoring if your vehicle has it) to
F Lock the vehicle using the the remote control. avoid unwanted triggering of the alarm in
remote control. certain cases such as:
- occupant(s) present in the vehicle,
or - leaving a window partially open,
or
F Unlock the vehicle using the "Keyless Entry - washing your vehicle,
F Lock the vehicle using the "Keyless Entry - changing a wheel,
and Starting" system.
and starting" system. - towing your vehicle,
The monitoring system is deactivated: the - transport on a ferry.
The monitoring system is active: the indicator
indicator lamp in the button is off and the
lamp in the button flashes once per second and
direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds.
the the direction indicators come on for about
2 seconds.
After an instruction to lock the vehicle using
the remote control or the Keyless Entry
If the vehicle self-locks automatically
and Starting system, the exterior perimeter
(occurs after 30 seconds if a door or
monitoring is activated after a delay of
the boot is not opened), the monitoring
5 seconds, the interior volumetric monitoring
system is not reactivated automatically.
after 45 seconds.
To reactivate the system, it is necessary
If an opening (door, boot, bonnet...) is not
to unlock and then lock the vehicle
closed fully, the vehicle is not locked but
again, using the remote control or the
monitoring will be activated after a delay of
"Keyless Entry and starting" system.
45 seconds.
66
Access
2
Triggering of the alarm
This is indicated by sounding of the siren
and flashing of the direction indicators for
Volumetric monitoring thirty seconds.
Deactivation Reactivation The monitoring functions remain active until
The tilt alarm is deactivated as well, if your The tilt alarm is reactivated as well, if your the alarm has been triggered eleven times in
vehicle has it. vehicle has it. succession.
F Switch of the ignition and within F Deactivate the exterior perimeter When the vehicle is unlocked using
ten seconds press this button monitoring by unlocking the the remote control or the Keyless
until its indicator lamp is on fixed. vehicle using the remote control Entry and starting system, rapid
or the Keyless Entry and starting flashing of the indicator lamp in the
button informs you that the alarm was
F Get out of the vehicle. system.
triggered during your absence.
When the ignition is switched on, this
F Immediately lock the vehicle The indicator lamp in the button goes off. flashing stops immediately.
using the remote control or the F Reactivate the full alarm system
"Keyless Entry and Starting" by locking the vehicle using the
system. remote control or the "Keyless
Entry and starting" system.
Only the exterior perimeter protection system is
active: the indicator lamp in the button flashes
once per second. The indicator lamp in the button flashes once
To be effective, this deactivation must be done per second again.
every time the ignition is switched off.
67
Access
Failure of the remote control Operating fault

To deactivate the monitoring functions: When the ignition is switched on,
F Unlock the vehicle using the key (integral fixed illumination of the indicator
with the remote control) in the driver's door lamp in the button indicates a fault in
lock. the system.
F Open the door; the alarm is triggered. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT
F Switch on the ignition; the alarm stops. The dealer or a qualified workshop.
indicator lamp in the button goes off.
Locking the vehicle without Automatic activation

activating the alarm
F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key This function is either not available, an option
(integral with the remote control) in the or is standard.
driver's door lock. 2 minutes after the last door or the boot is
closed, the system is activated automatically.
F To avoid triggering the alarm on entering

the vehicle, first press the unlocking button
on the remote control or unlock the vehicle
using the Keyless Entry and starting
system.
68
Access
Electric windows
2
Manual operation Safety anti-pinch
(depending on version)
To open or close the window, press or pull the When the window rises and meets an obstacle,
switch gently. The window stops as soon as the it stops and immediately partially lowers again.
switch is released.
In the event of unwanted opening of the window
when closing automatically, press the switch
until the window opens completely, then pull
Automatic one-touch operation the switch immediately until the window closes.
(depending on version) Continue to hold the switch for approximately
one second after the window has closed.
1. Front left. To open or close the window, press or pull
2. Front right the switch fully: the window opens or closes
3. Rear right. completely when the switch is released. The safety anti-pinch function is not active
4. Rear left. Pressing the switch again stops the movement during this operation.
5. Deactivating the rear electric window of the window.
switches.
The electric window switches remain

operational for approximately one minute after
Maintaining the locking action (on the the key has been removed.
key or the remote control) closes the Once this time has elapsed, the electric
windows automatically. windows will not operate. To reactivate them,
switch the ignition on again.
69
Access
Deactivating the rear Always remove the key when leaving

window controls the vehicle, even for a short time.
In the event of contact during operation
of the windows, you must reverse the
For the safety of your children, press movement of the window. To do this,
this switch to prevent operation press the switch concerned.
of the windows of the rear doors, When operating the passenger electric
irrespective of their position. window switches, the driver must
ensure that no one is preventing correct
With the indicator lamp on, the rear switches closing of the windows.
are deactivated. The driver must ensure that the
With the indicator lamp off, the switches are passengers use the electric windows
active. correctly.
Be aware of children when operating
the windows.
Reinitialising the electric
windows
Following reconnection of the battery, the
safety anti-pinch function must be reinitialised.
The safety anti-pinch is not active during these
operations:
- lower the window completely, then raise
it, it will rise in steps of a few centimetres
each time the switch is pressed. Repeat
the operation until the window closes
completely,
- press and hold the switch upwards for
at least one second after reaching this
position, window closed.
70
PEUGEOT i-Cockpit Steering wheel adjustment

Before moving the seat backwards,
ensure that there is nothing that might
prevent the full travel of the seat, so
3
as to avoid the risk of of jamming the
seat caused by the presence of objects
on the floor behind the seat or rear
passengers. If the seat jams, stop the
movement immediately.
Before taking to the road and to make the most F When stationary, lower the control lever
of the special ergonomics of the PEUGEOT to release the steering wheel adjustment
i-Cockpit, carry out these adjustments in the mechanism.
following order: F Adjust the height and reach to suit your
- head restraint height, driving position.
- backrest angle, F Pull the control lever to lock the steering
- seat cushion height, wheel adjustment mechanism.
- seat longitudinal position,
- steering wheel reach and then height
- the interior and door mirrors. As a safety precaution, these
operations should only be carried out
Once these adjustments have been made, while the vehicle is stationary.
ensure that from your driving position you can
see the "head-up" instrument panel clearly,
over the reduced diameter steering wheel.
71
Front seats with manual adjustments

As a safety measure, seat adjustments should only be carried out when stationary.
Forwards-backwards Height Seat backrest angle
F Raise the control and slide the seat F Pull the control upwards to raise or push F Turn the knob to adjust the backrest.
forwards or backwards. it downwards to lower, as many times as
required, to obtain the position required.
Before moving the seat backwards, ensure that there is nothing that might prevent the full
Lumbar
travel of the seat, so as to avoid the risk of of jamming the seat caused by the presence of F Turn the knob manually to obtain the
objects on the floor behind the seat or rear passengers. If the seat jams, stop the movement desired level of lumbar support.
immediately.
72
Electric driver's seat

Forwards-backwards Seat backrest angle Seat cushion height and
angle
F Push the control forwards or rearwards to F Tilt the control forwards or rearwards to F Tip the rear of the control upwards or
slide the seat. adjust the angle of the seat backrest. downwards to obtain the desired height.
F Tip the front of the control upwards or
downwards to obtain the desired angle.
Before moving the seat backwards, ensure that there is nothing that might prevent the full
travel of the seat, so as to avoid the risk of of jamming the seat caused by the presence of
objects on the floor behind the seat or rear passengers. If the seat jams, stop the movement To avoid discharging the battery, carry out
immediately. these adjustments with the engine running.
73
Storing driving positions
Storing a position Recalling a stored position

Using buttons M / 1 / 2 Ignition on or engine running
F Switch on the ignition. F Press button 1 or 2 to recall the
F Adjust your seat and the door mirrors. corresponding position.
F Press button M, then press button 1 or 2 An audible signal confirms that adjustment is
within four seconds. complete.
An audible signal indicates that the position has You can interrupt the current movement by
been stored. pressing button M, 1 or 2 or by using one of the
Storing a new position cancels the previous seat controls.
position. A stored position cannot be recalled while
System which registers the electrical settings driving.
of the driver's seat and the door mirrors. Recalling stored positions is deactivated
You can store and recall two positions using 45 seconds after switching off the ignition.
the buttons on the side of the driver's seat.
74
Additional adjustments
Head restraint height The head restraint is fitted with a frame Heated seats control
with notches which prevents it from
lowering; this is a safety device in case
3
of impact.
The adjustment is correct when the
upper edge of the head restraint is
level with the top of the head.
Never drive with the head restraints
removed; they must be in place and
adjusted correctly.
With the engine running, the front seats can be

heated separately.
F Use the adjustment wheel to switch on and
select the level of heating required:
0: Off.
F To raise the head restraint, pull it upwards.
1: Low.
F To remove the head restraint, press the
2: Medium.
lug A and pull the head restraint upwards.
3: High.
F To put the head restraint back in place, engage
the head restraint stems in the openings
keeping them in line with the seat back.
F To lower the head restraint, press the lug A
and the head restraint at the same time.
75
Electric lumbar adjustment Massage function

Deactivation
You can deactivate the massage
function at any time by pressing this
switch, its indicator lamp goes off.
This system provides the occupants of the front

seats with a lumbar massage. It only operates
when the engine is running or in STOP mode of
the Stop & Start system.
F Press the control to obtain the desired Activation

lumbar support.
F Press this switch.
Its indicator lamp comes on and the massage

function is activated for a period of 1 hour.
During this time, massage is performed in
6 cycles of 10 minutes (6 minutes of massage
followed by 4 minutes break).
After one hour, the function is deactivated, the
indicator lamp goes off.
Adjustment of intensity
Press this button to adjust the
intensity of the massage.
Two levels of massage are available.
76
Rear seats (hatchback)

Rear seats with fixed one-piece cushion and 1/3 - 2/3 split backrests which can be folded individually to adapt the load space in the boot.
Folding the backrest Repositioning the seat backrest
F Move the corresponding front seat forward F Press control 1 to release the seat F Straighten the seat backrest 2 and secure it.
if necessary. backrest 2. F Check that the red indicator, located next to
F Check that the corresponding outer seat F Fold the seat backrest 2 on to the the control 1, is no longer visible.
belt is positioned correctly against the cushion 3. F Unbuckle and reposition the outer seat belt
backrest and buckle it. on the side of the backrest.
F Place the head restraints in the low When folding the seat, the centre seat
position. belt should not be fastened, but laid out
flat on the seat
When repositioning the seat backrest,

The rear seat cushion does not fold, take care not to trap the seat belts.
just the seat backrest can be folded to
increase the boot loading space.
77
Rear seats (SW)

1/3 - 2/3 split rear seats which can be folded to vary the boot load space.
Folding the seat from the Folding the seat from the
boot rear
Each section of the seat (1/3 or 2/3) has its own control to release the seat back from inside the
boot.
F Check that nothing is preventing the seat

backrest folding and that no object might
F Check that nothing is preventing the seat F Pull the control from inside the boot, the interfere with the seat manoeuvre
back from folding (seat belts, ...) and that seat backrest folds onto the cushion. (above as well as below).
no object might interfere with the seat F Move the corresponding front seat
manoeuvre (above as well as below). forwards if necessary.
F Place the head restraints in the low F Check that the seat belt is positioned
position. correctly on the side of the seat back.
F Place the head restraints in the low
position.
78
Returning the seat back to Outer rear seat head

its original position restraints
F Pull the control 1 forwards, the seat F Put the seat back in the upright position These have one position for use (up) and
backrest folds onto the cushion. and secure it. a stowed position (down).
F Check that the red indicator, located at the They can be removed and are interchangeable.
control 1, is no longer visible.
F Refit the head restraints or put them back To remove a head restraint:
in place. F pull the head restraint upwards to the stop,
F then, press the lug A.
When returning the rear seat back to The centre head restraint is not
its original position, take care not to adjustable.
trap the seat belts and ensure that their
buckles are positioned correctly. Never drive with the head restraints
removed; they must be in place and
correctly adjusted.
79
Interior fittings
1. Cooled glove box
Through a ventilation nozzle, if open,
engine running and air conditioning on.
2. 12 V accessory socket (120 W)
Observe the maximum power rating to
avoid damaging your accessory
3. USB port
4. Jack auxiliary socket
5. Cup holder (depending on version)
6. Storage (depending on version)
7. Storage - Retractable cup holder
Turn the carrier for access to the cup
holder.
8. Front armrest
9. 230 V (120 W) accessory socket
Observe the power rating to avoid
damaging your accessory.
80
Mats
Fitting Removal
3
To remove the mat on the driver's side:
F move the seat as far back as possible,
F unclip the fixings,
F remove the mat.
Refitting
To refit the mat on the driver's side:
F position the mat correctly,
F refit the fixings by pressing,
F check that the mat is secured correctly.
When fitting the mat for the first time, on the To avoid any risk of jamming of the
driver's side use only the fixings provided in the pedals:
wallet attached. - only use mats which are suited to
The other mats are simply placed on the the fixings already present in the
carpet. vehicle; these fixings must be used,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
The use of mats not approved by
PEUGEOT may interfere with access to
the pedals and hinder the operation of
the cruise control / speed limiter.
The mats approved by PEUGEOT have
two fixings located below the seat.
81
Front armrest
The height and longitudinal position of the armrest cover can be adjusted for greater comfort.
Height adjustment Longitudinal adjustment Storage
F Raise the cover to the required position F Slide the cover fully forwards or rearwards. F Raise the lever.
(low, intermediate or high). F Raise the cover fully.
F If you raise the cover slightly beyond the
high position, guide it when lowering it to
the low position.
82
12 V accessory USB port Auxiliary socket

socket
F To connect a 12 V accessory (maximum It allows the connection of a portable device, It permits the connection of a portable device
power: 120 Watts), lift the cover and such as a digital audio player of the iPod ® type to listen to your music files via the vehicle's
connect a suitable adaptor. or a USB memory stick. speakers.
It reads the audio files which are transmitted to The management of the files is done using your
your audio system and played via the vehicle's
portable device.
Observe the maximum power rating to speakers.
avoid damaging your accessory. You can manage these files using the steering
mounted controls or the audio system.
The connection of an electrical device When a USB port is used, the portable
not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a device charges automatically.
For more information on the use of
USB charger, may adversely affect the While charging, a message is displayed
this equipment, refer to the "Audio and
operation of vehicle electrical systems, if the current consumption of the
telematics" section.
causing faults such as poor telephone portable device exceeds the power
reception or interference with displays rating of the port.
in the screens. For more information on using this
equipment, refer to the "Audio and
telematics" section.
83
230 V / 50 Hz power socket

Connect only one device at a time to
the socket (no extension or multi-way
connector).
Connect only devices with class II
insulation (shown on the device).
Do not use a device with a metal case.
As a safety measure, when electrical
consumption is high and when required
by the vehicle's electrical system
(particular weather conditions, electrical
overload...), the current supply to the
A 230 V / 50 Hz socket (maximum power: socket will be cut off; the green warning
120 W) is fitted in the rear storage box. lamp goes off.
This socket works with the engine running, as
well as in STOP mode with Stop & Start.
F Open the central storage box,
F Check that the warning lamp is on green,
F Connect your multimedia or other electrical
device (telephone charger, laptop The different "ports and sockets" can
computer, CD-DVD player, baby food be either not available, an option or
warmer...). standard, depending on the trim level of
the vehicle.
In the event of a fault with the socket, the green
warning lamp flashes.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
84
Rear armrest Ski flap

It allows long objects to be carried in the
vehicle.
3
F Lower the rear armrest for a more
comfortable position.
It may be fitted with cup holders and also gives F Lower the armrest.
access to the ski flap. F Press the flap opening control.
F Lower the flap.
F Load the objects from inside the boot.
Do not leave the flap open when not

carrying long objects in the vehicle.
85
Boot fittings (hatchback)

1. Rear parcel shelf
2. Boot floor
Raise the floor for access to the storage.
3. Storage wells
in which are stowed:
- the towing eye,
- the temporary puncture repair kit,
- the spare wheel, depending on trim
level, an option or standard.
4. Stowing rings
5. Strap (depending on version)
86
Boot fittings (SW)

1. Boot lamp
2. Rear seat folding controls
3. 12 V accessory socket (120 W max)
3
4. Removable storage boxes
Pull up to unclip them.
5. Storage wells
where are stowed:
- the towing eye,
- the temporary puncture repair kit,
- the spare wheel, depending on trim
level, an option or standard.
6. Strap
7. Load space cover
(see corresponding section)
8. Eyes for fixing a net (to restrain luggage)

(depending on version)
F Extract the eyes one at a time then slide
them into the oblong housing.
F While pressing the button, move the eye to
the desired position.
F Observe the direction of fitting (eyes in the
vertical position towards the outside of the
vehicle).
87
Load space cover, roller blind (SW)

To reel in To remove Storage
F Remove the roller guide from the rails in F Place a hand on the left under the luggage A recess in the floor well, under the boot
the boot pillars. cover. carpet, allows the luggage cover to be stowed
F Release the roller blind, it reels in F Turn the end of the reel towards the front diagonally.
automatically. (clockwise) to release it.
F Repeat the operation on the right (anti- This recess is not available with the
clockwise). bass woofer unit.
88
High load (SW)

To install Luggage retaining net
This allows the use of the entire loading volume up to the roof:
3
- behind the front seats (row 1) when the rear seats are folded.
- behind the rear seats (row 2).
F Position the left and then right hand ends

of the luggage cover in their respective
housings.
F Place your hands on the roller then turn the
assembly to the rear to secure it. Row 1 Row 2
F Unreel the roller blind until it locks on the F Fold the rear seats. F Remove the cover trims in the roof on each
rear pillar. F Remove the cover trims in the roof on each side.
side. F Position the net's upper hooks in the roof,
F Position the net's upper hooks in the roof, on each side in turn.
on each side in turn. F Attach the bottom of the net to the rings
F Attach the bottom of the net to the fixings located either side of the boot carpet or on
located at the seat belt mountings. the boot rails (depending on trim level).
F Pull on the straps to stretch the net. F Pull on the straps to stretch the net.
Once fitted, the net does not prevent folding of
the rear seat backrests.
89
Heating and Ventilation

Air intake
The air circulating in the passenger compartment
is filtered and originates either from the outside via
the grille located at the base of the windscreen or
from the inside in air recirculation mode.
Controls
The incoming air follows various routes
depending on the controls selected by
the driver, the front passenger and rear
passengers, according to the level of
equipment.
The temperature control enables you to obtain
the level of comfort required by mixing the air of
the various circuits.
The air distribution control enables you to
select the air vents used in the passenger
compartment by the combined use of the
associated buttons.
The air flow control enables you to increase or
reduce the speed of the ventilation fan.
Depending on your vehicle, the controls are Air distribution
accessible in the "Air conditioning" menu of
1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents. 4. Central adjustable air vents.
the touch screen or are grouped together on
2. Front side window demisting/defrosting 5. Air outlets to the front footwells.
control panel on the centre console.
vents. 6. Air outlets to the rear footwells.
3. Side adjustable air vents.
90
Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning

In order for these systems to be fully effective, follow the operation and maintenance If after an extended stop in sunshine,
guidelines below: the interior temperature is very high, first
F To obtain an even air distribution, take care not to obstruct the exterior air intake grilles ventilate the passenger compartment for
3
located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents and the air outlets, as well a few moments.
as the air extractor located in the boot. Put the air flow control at a setting high
F Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on the dashboard; this is used for regulation enough to quickly change the air in the
of the air conditioning system. passenger compartment.
F Operate the air conditioning system for at least 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a month The air conditioning system does not
to keep it in perfect working order. contain chlorine and does not present
F Ensure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have the filter any danger to the ozone layer.
elements replaced regularly.
We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment filter. Thanks to its
special active additive, it contributes to the purification of the air breathed by the
The condensation created by the air
occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment (reduction of allergic
conditioning results in a discharge
symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits).
of water under the vehicle which is
F To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also advised to have
perfectly normal.
it checked regularly as recommended in the warranty and maintenance record.
F If the system does not produce cold air, switch it off and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Stop & Start
When towing the maximum load on a steep gradient in high temperatures, switching off the The heating and air conditioning
air conditioning increases the available engine power and so improves the towing ability. systems only work when the engine
is running. To maintain a comfortable
temperature in the passenger
compartment, you can temporarily
deactivate the Stop & Start system (see
the corresponding section).
91
Heating / Ventilation Manual air conditioning

The air conditioning system only operates with the engine running.
Temperature adjustment Air flow adjustment If you put the air flow control in the
minimum position (system off), the
F Turn the dial from blue F Turn the dial to obtain a
temperature is no longer controlled.
(cold) to red (hot) to adjust comfortable air flow.
However, a slight flow of air can still be
the temperature to your
felt, resulting from the movement of the
requirements.
vehicle.
92
Air distribution adjustment Air conditioning On / Off
3
Windscreen and side windows. The air conditioning is designed to
operate effectively in all seasons,
with the windows closed.
Central and side vents. It enables you to:
- lower the temperature, in summer,
- increase the effectiveness of the demisting
Footwells. in winter, above 3°C.
Switching on
F Press this button, its indicator lamp
The air distribution can be adapted by adding comes on.
the corresponding buttons.
The air conditioning does not operate
when the air flow adjustment is set
to off.
To obtain cool air more quickly, you can use

interior air recirculation for a few moments.
Then return to the intake of exterior air.
Switching off
F Press this button again, its indicator lamp
goes off.
Switching off may result in some discomfort
(humidity, misting).
93
Manual air conditioning (Touch screen)

The air conditioning system operates with the Temperature adjustment Air flow adjustment
engine running.
Press one of these buttons to
Press the button for the "Air increase or decrease the speed of
conditioning" menu to display the the air booster fan.
system controls page.
F Press one of these buttons to reduce or The air flow symbol (a fan) fills progressively
increase the value. according to the quantity of air wanted.
By reducing the air flow to minimum, you are
stopping ventilation.
Avoid driving too long without ventilation

(risk of misting and deterioration of air
quality).
94
Air distribution adjustment Air conditioning On / Off
3
These buttons are used to arrange The air conditioning is designed to
the distribution of air in the passenger operate effectively in all seasons,
compartment by combining several air outlets. with the windows closed.
It enables you to:
Windscreen. - lower the temperature, in summer,
- increase the effectiveness of the demisting
in winter, above 3°C.
Central and side vents.
Switching on
F Press this button, its indicator lamp
Footwells. comes on.
The air conditioning does not operate

The air distribution can be adapted by using when the air flow adjustment is set
several buttons: illumination of the indicator to off.
lamp confirms the presence of fan boosted air
To obtain cool air more quickly, you can use
in the direction indicated, the indicator lamp off
interior air recirculation for a few moments.
indicates the absence of fan boosted air in the
Then return to the intake of exterior air.
direction indicated.
For a uniform distribution of air in the
passenger compartment, the three buttons can
be activated simultaneously. Switching off
F Press this button again, its
indicator lamp goes off.
Switching off may result in some discomfort

(humidity, misting).
95
Dual-zone digital air conditioning (Touch screen)

This air conditioning system operates with the engine running, but the ventilation and its controls Temperature adjustment
are available with the ignition on.
Operation of the air conditioning and regulation of temperature, air flow and air distribution in the The driver and front passenger can each set
passenger compartment are automatic according to the temperature in the passenger compartment the temperature.
and the temperature setting. F Press one of these buttons to
increase the value.
Press the button for the "Air conditioning" menu to display the controls for the air
conditioning system. F Press one of these buttons to
decrease the value.
The value indicated corresponds to a level of

comfort and not to a temperature in degrees
Centigrade or Fahrenheit (depending on the
units chosen).
A setting around 21 provides an optimum level
of comfort. Depending on your requirements, a
setting between 18 and 24 is normal.
In addition, it is recommended that you avoid a
difference between the left and right setting of
more than 3.
96
Automatic comfort programme

F Press the "AUTO" button This setting is associated with AUTO mode
3
to activate or deactivate the only. However, on deactivation of AUTO mode,
automatic mode of the air the indicator for the last setting remains on.
conditioning system. Changing the setting does not reactivate AUTO
mode if deactivated.
When the indicator lamp in the button is on, the
air conditioning system operates automatically:
the system manages the temperature, air
flow and air distribution in the passenger In cold conditions and when the engine
compartment in an optimum way according to is cold, to limit distribution of cold air
the comfort level you have selected. in the passenger compartment, the
air flow will change gradually until the
To change the current setting, shown by the
It is possible to modulate the intensity comfort setting is reached.
green indicator lamp, press the button for the
of the automatic comfort programme On entering the vehicle, if the interior
desired mode:
by choosing one of three mode temperature is much colder or warmer
settings offered in a secondary page than the comfort value setting, there
"Soft": provides soft and quiet
of the "Air conditioning" menu. is no need to alter the value displayed
operation by limiting air flow.
in order to reach more quickly the
required level of comfort. The system
compensates automatically and
"Normal": offers the best compromise corrects the temperature difference as
between a comfortable temperature quickly as possible.
and quiet operation (default setting).
"Fast": provides strong and effective

air flow.
97
Resuming manual control

You can manually adjust one or more settings, Air flow adjustment Air distribution adjustment
while retaining automatic control of the other
functions: F Press one of these buttons You can modulate the distribution of air in the
- air flow, to increase or decrease the passenger compartment using these three buttons.
- air distribution. speed of the booster fan.
Windscreen.
As soon as you modify a setting, the indicator The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in
lamp in the "AUTO" button goes off. progressively in relation to the quantity of air
wanted. Footwells.
F Press the "AUTO" button again
By reducing the air flow to minimum, you are
to activate the automatic comfort
stopping ventilation.
programme again.
"OFF" is displayed alongside the fan.
Centre and side vents.
Avoid driving for too long with the

ventilation off (risk of misting and
deterioration of air quality). Each press on a button activates or deactivates
the function. The indicator lamp is on when the
button is activated. For a uniform distribution in
the passenger compartment, all three buttons
can be pressed simultaneously.
In AUTO mode, the indicator lamps in all three

buttons are off.
98
Air conditioning On/Off Ventilation with "ignition "Mono" function

on" function
The air conditioning is designed to With the ignition on, you can use the The comfort setting for the passenger's side
3
operate efficiently in all seasons, with ventilation system and have access to the can be indexed to the driver's comfort setting
the windows closed. "Air conditioning" menu to adjust the air (mono-zone).
flow and air distribution in the passenger
It allows you: From the secondary page of the "Air
compartment.
- in summer, to lower the temperature, conditioning" menu:
This function is available for a few minutes,
- in winter, above 3 °C, to improve demisting.
depending on the state of charge of the battery F Press this button to activate /
of your vehicle. deactivate the "Mono" function.
The indicator lamp in the button
Switching on This function does not activate the air is on when the function is
F Press the "A/C" button to activate the air conditioning. activated.
conditioning. You can make use of the residual heat in the
engine to warm the passenger compartment The function is deactivated automatically when
When the indicator lamp under the button is on,
using the temperature setting buttons. the passenger uses their temperature setting
the air conditioning function is activated.
buttons.
The air conditioning cannot operate when the
air flow is set to off.
Switching off
F Press the "A/C" button again to deactivate
the air conditioning.
When the indicator lamp under the button is off,
the air conditioning function is deactivated.
99
Air intake / Air recirculation F Press this button to recirculate

the interior air. Its indicator lamp
comes on.
F Press the button again to allow

fresh air into the passenger
compartment. Its indicator lamp
goes off.
Return to exterior air intake as soon as

possible to prevent deterioration of the
air quality and the formation of mist.
The intake of exterior air avoids misting of the
windscreen and side windows.
The recirculation of interior air insulates the
passenger compartment from exterior odours
and smoke.
This allows hot or cold air to be

delivered quickly when required.
100
Front demist - defrost

These markings on the control panel indicate the control positions for rapid demisting or
defrosting of the windscreen and side windows.
3
With manual air With manual or dual-zone
conditioning digital air conditioning
(with the touch screen)
F Put the air flow, temperature and F Press this button to demist or
distribution controls to the dedicated defrost the windscreen and side
marked position. windows as quickly as possible.
F Press the "A/C" button for air conditioning;
the indicator lamp in the button comes on. The system automatically manages the air
conditioning, air flow and air intake, and
provides optimum distribution towards the
windscreen and side windows.
F To stop, press this button again or on
"AUTO".
The system reverts to the previous settings.

With Stop & Start, when demisting has
been activated, the STOP mode is not
available.
101
Rear screen demist - defrost

Switching off
The demisting/defrosting switches off automatically
to prevent an excessive consumption of current.
F It is possible to stop the
demisting/defrosting operation
before it is switched off
automatically by pressing the
button again.
The indicator lamp associated with
the button goes off.
Switching on Switch off the heating of the rear screen

F Press this button to demist/ and door mirrors as soon as you judge it
defrost the rear screen and possible, as reducing the consumption
(depending on version) the door of electrical current reduces fuel
mirrors. consumption.
The indicator lamp associated with
the button comes on.
The rear screen demist - defrost

can only operate when the engine is
running.
102
Panoramic sunroof
Its electric blind improves thermal and acoustic comfort.
Electric blind
Anti-pinch
If the blind encounters an obstacle, you
should reverse the movement. Use the
3
control to do this.
Remember to always switch off the

ignition when leaving the vehicle, even
for a short time.
When operating the control, the driver
should ensure that there is nothing
Opening Closing preventing movement of the blind.
F Press the back of the control without going F Press the front of the control without going The driver must ensure that passengers
beyond the point of resistance. beyond the point of resistance. use the blind correctly.
The blind stops when your release the control. The blind stops when your release the control. Be aware of children when operating
the blind.
You can also press or pull the control

beyond the point of resistance: the blind
opens or closes completely after you
release the control.
Operating the control again stops the
movement of the blind.
103
Courtesy lamps
Front - rear courtesy lamps Front - rear map reading
In this position, the courtesy lamp
lamps
comes on gradually: F With the ignition on, press the
corresponding switch.
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when the electronic key is removed from
the reader, Take care to avoid leaving anything in
- when opening a door, contact with the courtesy lamps.
- when the remote control locking button is
used, in order to locate your vehicle.
It switches off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked, With the "permanent lighting" mode, the lighting
- when the ignition is switched on, time varies according to the circumstances:
- 30 seconds after the last door is closed. - with the ignition off, approximately
ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode, approximately
thirty seconds,
Permanently off. - with the engine running, unlimited.
Permanent lighting.
1. Front courtesy lamp

Depending on version, you can also
2. Front map reading lamps
switch the courtesy lamp on or off by
3. Rear courtesy lamp
pressing this button.
4. Rear map reading lamps
104
Footwell lighting Interior mood lighting

The dimmed passenger compartment lighting improves visibility in the vehicle when the light is
poor.
Switching on Switching on
3
At night, the courtesy lamps and lighting for
the interior opening controls on the front doors
come on automatically when the sidelamps are
switched on.
The interior mood lighting switches off
automatically when the sidelamps are switched
off.
The brightness of the interior mood lighting can

be adjusted in the "Driving assistance" menu.
F Select the "Vehicle settings" menu.
F Check the "Mood lighting" line.
Its operation is identical to that of the courtesy
lamps. The lamps comes on when one of the
doors is opened.
Press on the "magnifying glass" to

adjust the brightness.
105
Lighting and visibility
Mirrors
Door mirrors Folding
F From outside: lock the vehicle using the
electronic key or the Keyless Entry and
Starting system.
F From inside: with the ignition on, pull the
control A in the central position rearwards.
Adjustment If the mirrors are folded using control A,

F Move control A to the right or to the left to they will not unfold when the vehicle is
select the corresponding mirror. unlocked. Pull again on control A.
F Move control B in all four directions to
adjust.
Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass F Return control A to the central position. Unfolding
providing the lateral rearward vision necessary
for overtaking or parking. F From outside: unlock the vehicle using the
They can also be folded for parking in confined electronic key or the Keyless Entry and
spaces. For more information on demisting - Starting system.
defrosting the rear screen, refer to the F From inside: with the ignition on, pull the
corresponding section. control A in the central position rearwards.
Demisting - Defrosting
The folding and unfolding of the door
As a safety measure, the mirrors should
Demisting-defrosting of the door mirrors using the remote control can be
be adjusted to reduce the "blind spots".
mirrors operates with the engine deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
The objects observed are, in reality,
running, by switching on the heated qualified workshop.
closer than they appear.
rear screen.
Take this into account in order to
correctly judge the distance of vehicles
approaching from behind. If necessary, it is possible to fold the
mirrors manually.
106
Rear view mirror

Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which darkens the mirror glass and reduces the nuisance to
the driver caused by the sun, headlamps from other vehicles...
Manual day/night model Automatic day/night model
4
Adjustment
F Adjust the mirror so that the glass is By means of a sensor, which measures the
directed correctly in the "day" position. light from the rear of the vehicle, this system
automatically and progressively changes
Day / night position between the day and night uses.
F Pull the lever to change to the "night"
anti-dazzle position. In order to ensure optimum visibility
F Push the lever to change to the normal during your manoeuvres, the mirror
"day" position. lightens automatically when reverse
gear is engaged.
107
Lighting control stalk

Selection and control of the various front and rear lamps providing the vehicle's lighting and signalling.
Main lighting Additional lighting Automatic lighting functions

There are various lamps on the vehicle: Other lamps are installed to fulfil the Various automatic lighting functions are also
- sidelamps, to be seen, requirements of particular driving conditions: available depending on options:
- dipped beam headlamps to see without - rear foglamps, to better signal the - guide-me-home lighting (from a distance),
dazzling other drivers, presence of the vehicle in foggy conditions, - welcome lighting,
- main beam headlamps to see clearly when - front foglamps, for better visibility in foggy - daytime running lamps,
the road is clear. conditions and to improve lighting at - automatic illumination of headlamps.
intersections and when parking,
- daytime running lamps at the front, to be
seen during the day.
Programming
You can adjust the settings of certain functions:
- guide-me-home lighting (remotely),
- welcome lighting.
In some weather conditions (e.g. low Travelling abroad

temperature or humidity), the presence
If using your vehicle in a country that
of misting on the internal surface of the
drives on the other side of the road, the
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps
headlamps must be adjusted to avoid
is normal; it disappears after the lamps
dazzling on-coming drivers.
have been on for a few minutes.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
108
Selection ring for main lighting Dipping the headlamps

mode
Turn the ring to align the desired symbol with
the marking.
Lighting off (ignition off) / Front daytime

running lamps (engine running).
Automatic illumination of headlamps.
4
Sidelamps only.
Dipped or main beam headlamps. Pull the stalk to switch the lighting between
dipped / main beam headlamps.
Model without AUTO lighting
In the lighting off and sidelamps modes, the
driver can switch on the main beam headlamps
temporarily ("headlamp flash") by maintaining a
pull on the stalk.
Displays
Illumination of the corresponding indicator lamp
in the instrument panel confirms the lighting
switched on.
Model with AUTO lighting
109
Foglamp selection ring

The rear foglamps operate with the sidelamps on.
The front foglamps operate with dipped beam on (in manual or auto mode).
Rear foglamp only Front and

rear foglamps
F To switch it on, turn the ring forwards. Rotate and release the ring: When the headlamps switch off with automatic
When the lighting is switched off automatically F forwards a first time to switch on the front illumination of headlamps (AUTO model)
(with AUTO model), the foglamp and the dipped foglamps, or when the dipped beam headlamps are
beam headlamps will remain on. F forwards a second time to switch on the switched off manually, the foglamps and
F To switch it off, turn the ring rearwards. rear foglamps, sidelamps remain on.
F rearwards a first time to switch off the rear F Turn the ring rearwards to switch off the
foglamps, foglamps, the sidelamps will then switch off.
F rearwards a second time to switch of the
front fog lamps.
110
Direction indicators
In good or rainy weather, both day Lighting left on audible signal
4
and night, the front foglamps and the
An audible signal when a front door
rear foglamps are prohibited. In these
is opened warns the driver that the
situations, the power of their beams
vehicle's exterior lighting is on, with the
may dazzle other drivers. They should
ignition off and in manual lighting mode.
only be used in fog or snow.
In this case, switching off the lighting
In these weather conditions, it is your
stops the audible signal.
responsibility to switch on the foglamps
With the ignition off, if the dipped
and dipped headlamps manually as the
headlamps remain on, the vehicle goes
sunshine sensor may detect sufficient
into "ECO" mode to avoid discharging
light.
the battery. F Left: lower the lighting stalk passing the
Do not forget to switch off the front
foglamps and the rear foglamps when point of resistance.
they are no longer needed. F Right: raise the lighting stalk passing the
point of resistance.
The lighting goes off when you switch
off the ignition, but you can always
switch it on again using the lighting
Three flashes of the direction
control stalk.
indicators
F Press briefly upwards or downwards,
without going beyond the point of
resistance; the direction indicators will
flash 3 times.
111
Front daytime running Automatic illumination of

lamps headlamps
(light-emitting diodes) Deactivation
F Turn the ring to another position.
Deactivation of the function is
accompanied by the display of a message.
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction of the
sunshine sensor, the lighting comes
on, this warning lamp is displayed
in the instrument panel accompanied by an
When a low level of ambient light is detected audible signal and/or a message.
by a sunshine sensor, the number plate Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
They come on automatically when the engine lamps, sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps workshop.
is started, when the lighting control stalk is in are switched on automatically, without any
action on the part of the driver. They can also In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor
position "0" or "AUTO". may detect sufficient light. In this
come on if rain is detected, at the same time as
automatic operation of the windscreen wipers. case, the lighting will not come on
As soon as the brightness returns to a automatically.
sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers Do not cover the sunshine sensor,
are switched off, the lamps are switched off coupled with the rain sensor and
automatically. located in the centre of the windscreen
behind the rear view mirror; the
associated functions would no longer
Activation be controlled.
F Turn the ring to the "AUTO" position. The
activation of the function is accompanied
by the display of a message.
112
Manual Automatic guide-me-home Exterior welcome

guide-me-home lighting lighting lighting
Temporarily keeping the dipped beam The remote switching on of the lighting makes
headlamps on after the vehicle's ignition has your approach to the vehicle easier in poor
been switched off makes the driver's exit easier When the automatic illumination of headlamps light. It is activated when the lighting control
when the light is poor. function is activated, under low ambient is in the "AUTO" position and the level of light
4
light the dipped beams headlamps come on detected by the sunshine sensor is low.
automatically when the ignition is switched off.
Activation or deactivation, as well Switching on

as the duration of the guide-me-
F Press the open padlock on the
home lighting, is set in the "Driving
remote control or one of the front
assistance" menu, then "Vehicle
door handles with Keyless Entry
settings" in the secondary page.
and Starting.
The dipped beam headlamps and sidelamps

Switching on come on; your vehicle is also unlocked.
F With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps

using the lighting stalk. Switching off
F A further "headlamp flash" switches the The exterior welcome lighting switches off
function off. automatically after a set time, when the ignition
is switched on or on locking the vehicle.
Switching off
The manual guide-me-home lighting switches
off automatically after a set time. Programming
The activation, deactivation and
choice of welcome lighting duration
are done in the "Driving assistance"
menu then "Vehicle settings".
113
Door mirror Headlamp beam height adjustment

spotlamps Manual adjustment of Automatic adjustment of
halogen headlamps "full-LED" headlamps
To make your approach to the vehicle easier,

these illuminate:
To avoid causing a nuisance to other road In order to avoid causing a nuisance to other
- the zones facing the driver’s and
users, the beams of the halogen headlamps road users, this system corrects the height of
passenger’s doors,
should be adjusted according to the load in the the "full LED" headlamps beam automatically,
- the zones forward of the door mirrors and
vehicle. according to the load in the vehicle.
rearward of the front doors.
0 Driver or driver + front passenger.
- Driver + front passenger + rear If a fault occurs, this warning lamp
Switching on passengers. is displayed in the instrument panel,
The spotlamps come on: 1 5 people. accompanied by an audible signal and a
- when you unlock the vehicle, - 5 people + a load in the boot. message in the instrument panel screen.
- when you switch off the ignition, 2 Driver + a load in the boot. The system then places your headlamps in the
- when you open a door, lowest position.
- when you use the remote control to locate
the vehicle.
The initial setting is position "0". If a fault occurs, do not touch the "full
Switching off LED" light sources. Contact a PEUGEOT
They are timed to go off automatically.
114
Wiper control stalk

Programming Manual controls
Your vehicle may also include some functions The wipers are controlled directly by the driver. Windscreen wipers
that can be configured:
Wiping speed control stalk: raise or lower the
- automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers,
stalk to the desired position.
- rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.
4
Fast wipe (heavy rain).
Normal wipe (moderate rain).

In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice
or frost present on the windscreen,
Intermittent wipe (proportional to the
around the wiper arms and blades and
speed of the vehicle).
the windscreen seal, before operating
the wipers. Park.
Model with manual wiping Single wipe (press downwards or pull

(intermittent) the stalk briefly towards you, then
Do not operate the wipers on a dry release).
windscreen. Under extremely hot or or
cold conditions, ensure that the wiper Automatic wiping (press down,
blades are not stuck to the windscreen then release).
before operating the wipers. Single wipe (pull the stalk briefly
towards you).
Model with AUTO wiping

115
Windscreen and headlamp

wash
Reverse gear
When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper
will come into operation automatically if the
windscreen wipers are operating.
Activation or deactivation of this automatic
function can be set in the touch screen.
F Select the "Driving assistance"

menu. F Pull the windscreen wiper stalk towards
you. The screenwash then the wipers
Rear wiper F In the secondary page, press "Vehicle operate for a fixed period.
settings". The headlamp wash is only activated if the
Rear wiper selection ring:
dipped headlamps are on and the vehicle is
moving.
This function is activated by default. With daytime running lamps, to activate the
Park.
headlamp wash, position the lighting stalk in
the dipped beam position.
If a significant accumulation of snow or
Intermittent wipe. ice is present, or when using a bicycle
carrier on the boot, deactivate the
automatic rear wiper.
On vehicles fitted with digital air
Wash-wipe (set duration). conditioning, any action on the
windscreen wash control results in
temporary closing of the air intake to
avoid odours inside the passenger
compartment.
116
Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers

Screenwash/headlamp wash The windscreen wipers operate automatically, without any action on the part of the driver, if rain is
level low detected (sensor behind the rear view mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of the rainfall.
In the case of vehicles fitted with headlamp
washers, when the fluid reservoir low level
The automatic rain sensitive windscreen
is reached this warning lamp comes on in
4
wipers must be reactivated by pushing
the instrument panel, accompanied by an
the control stalk downwards, if the
audible signal and a message.
ignition has been off for more than
The warning lamp comes on when the ignition one minute.
is switched on, or every time the stalk is
operated, until the reservoir is refilled.
Next time you stop, refill the screenwash / Operating fault
headlamp wash reservoir. If a fault occurs with the automatic rain
sensitive wipers, the wipers will operate in
intermittent mode.
Switching on Have it checked by PEUGEOT dealer or a
Briefly push the control stalk downwards. qualified workshop.
A wiping cycle confirms that the
instruction has been accepted.
Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with
This warning lamp comes on in the
the sunshine sensor and located in the
instrument panel and a message is
centre of the windscreen behind the rear
displayed.
view mirror.
Switching off Switch off the automatic rain sensitive
Briefly push the control stalk downwards wipers when using an automatic car wash.
again, or place the control stalk in In winter, it is advisable to wait until the
another position (Int, 1 or 2). windscreen is completely clear of ice
This warning lamp goes off in the before activating the automatic rain
instrument panel and a message is sensitive wipers.
displayed.
117
Special position of the

windscreen wipers
To maintain the effectiveness of the flat
wiper blades, it is advisable to:
- handle them with care,
- clean them regularly using soapy
water,
- avoid using them to retain
cardboard on the windscreen,
- replace them at the first signs of
wear.
This position permits release of the windscreen

wiper blades.
It is used for cleaning or replacement of the
blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to
detach the blades from the windscreen.
F Any action on the wiper stalk in the minute

after switching off the ignition places the
blades vertically on the screen.
F To park the blades again, switch on the
ignition and operate the wiper stalk.
118
Safety
Hazard warning lamps Emergency or

Visual warning with of all the direction Automatic operation of
assistance call
indicators flashing to alert other road users to a
vehicle breakdown, towing or accident.
hazard warning lamps
F Press this button, all of the direction When braking in an emergency, depending on
indicators flash. the rate of deceleration, as well as when the
They can operate with the ignition off. ABS regulation is invoked or in the event of an
impact, the hazard warning lamps come on
automatically.
They switch off automatically the first time you
accelerate.
5
F You can also switch them off by pressing
the button.
This system allows you to make an emergency

or assistance call to the emergency services or
to the dedicated PEUGEOT service.
For more information on the use of this

function, refer to the "Audio equipment
and telematics" section.
119
Safety
Horn Electronic stability control (ESC)

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) incorporating Emergency braking assistance
the following systems: (EBA)
- anti-lock braking system (ABS) and the
In an emergency, this system enables you to
electronic brake force distribution (EBFD),
reach the optimum braking pressure more
- emergency braking assistance (EBA),
quickly and therefore reduce the stopping
- wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) or traction
distance.
control,
It is triggered according to the speed at which
- dynamic stability control (DSC).
the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a
reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an
increase in the effectiveness of the braking.
Definitions Anti-slip regulation (ASR)

F Press the central part of the steering The ASR system (also known as Traction
wheel.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
Control) optimises traction in order to limit
and electronic brake force
wheel slip by acting on the brakes of the driving
distribution (EBFD)
wheels and on the engine. It also improves
This system improves the stability and the directional stability of the vehicle on
manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking acceleration.
and contributes towards improved control in
corners, in particular on poor or slippery road
surfaces. Dynamic stability control (DSC)
The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of If there is a difference between the path
emergency braking. followed by the vehicle and that required by
The electronic brake force distribution system the driver, the DSC monitors each wheel and
manages the braking pressure wheel by wheel. automatically acts on the brake of one or more
wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle
to the required path, within the limits of the laws
of physics.
120
Safety
Intelligent traction control Operation

system
Depending on version, your vehicle has a Anti-lock braking system (ABS) When changing wheels (tyres and rims),
system to help driving on snow: intelligent and electronic brake force make sure that these are approved for
traction control. distribution (EBFD) your vehicle.
This system detects situations of difficult
When this warning lamp comes on, Normal operation of the ABS may make
surface adhesion that could make it difficult to
accompanied by an audible signal itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake
move off or make progress on deep fresh snow
and a message, it indicates that there pedal.
5
or compacted snow.
In these situations, the intelligent traction is a fault with the ABS, which could
control limits the amount of wheel slip to cause loss of control of the vehicle
provide the best traction and trajectory control when braking. In emergency braking, press
for your vehicle. very firmly without releasing the
When this warning lamp comes on, pressure.
coupled with the STOP warning
The use of snow tyres is strongly recommended lamp, accompanied by an audible
on surfaces offering low levels of adhesion. signal and a message, it indicates
that there is a fault with the electronic brake
force distribution (EBFD), which could cause
loss of control of the vehicle when braking.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
In both cases, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
121
Safety
Deactivation Operating fault

In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle If this warning lamp comes on,
which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft accompanied by an audible signal
ground...), it may be advisable to deactivate the and a message, this indicates a
DSC system, so that the wheels can spin freely fault with the system.
and regain grip.
workshop to have the system checked.
But it is recommended that the system be
reactivated as soon as possible.
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
and anti-slip regulation (ASR) F Press the button. The DSC system offers exceptional
safety in normal driving, but this should
not encourage the driver to take extra
Activation risks or drive at high speed.
These systems are activated automatically This warning lamp and the indicator The correct operation of the system
each time the vehicle is started. lamp in the button come on: the depends on observation of the
As soon as they detect a problem of grip or DSC system no longer acts on the manufacturer's recommendations
trajectory, these systems act on the operation if operation of the engine. regarding the wheels (tyres and rims),
the engine and brakes. the braking components, the electronic
Reactivation
components and the assembly and
This is indicated by flashing of this The system is reactivated automatically each repair procedures used by PEUGEOT
warning lamp in the instrument panel. time the ignition is switched back on or from dealers.
30 mph (50 km/h) (except GT and GTi versions). After an impact, have the system
F Press the button again to checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
reactivate it manually. qualified workshop.
122
Safety
Seat belts
Front seat belts Rear seat belts
5
The rear seats are each fitted with a seat belt, Fastening
three-point anchorages with inertia reel and
F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the
force limiter (except for the centre rear seat).
buckle.
F Check that the seat belt is fastened
The front seat belts are fitted with a
pretensioning and force limiting system. correctly by pulling the strap.
This system improves safety in the front
seats in the event of a front or side impact.
Depending on the severity of the impact, the Unfastening
pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat
F Press the red button on the buckle.
belts against the body of the occupants.
The pretensioning seat belts are active when F Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
the ignition is on.
The force limiter reduces the pressure of the
seat belt on the chest of the occupant,
so improving their protection.
123
Safety
From approximately 12 mph

(20 km/h), the warning lamp(s)
flash for two minutes accompanied
by an audible signal. Once these
two minutes have elapsed, the
warning lamp(s) remain on until the
driver or one or more passengers
fasten their seat belt.
Seat belt not fastened / Front and rear seat belt warning
unfastened warning lamps lamps
1. Front and/or rear seat belts not fastened / On switching on the ignition, warning
unfastened warning lamp in the instrument lamp 1 comes on in the instrument
panel. panel and the corresponding
2. Front left seat belt warning lamp. warning lamp (2 to 6) comes on in
3. Front right seat belt warning lamp. red in the passenger's seat belt and
4. Rear right seat belt warning lamp. front airbag warning lamp display if
5. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp. the corresponding seat belt is not
6. Rear left seat belt warning lamp. fastened or is unfastened.
If a rear seatbelt is not fastened, the

corresponding warning lamp (4 to 6)
comes on for about 30 seconds.
124
Safety
Advice
The driver must ensure that passengers use In order to be effective, a seat belt must: Recommendations for children
the seat belts correctly and that they are all - be tightened as close to the body as
Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is
fastened before setting off. possible,
less than 12 years old or shorter than one
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, - be pulled in front of you with a smooth
and a half metres.
always fasten your seat belt, even for short movement, checking that it does not
Never use the same seat belt to secure more
journeys. twist,
than one person.
Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as - be used to restrain only one person,
Never allow a child to travel on your lap.
they will not fulfil their role fully. - not bear any trace of cuts or fraying,
For more information on child seats, refer to
The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel - not be converted or modified to avoid
the corresponding section.
permitting automatic adjustment of the affecting its performance.
5
length of the strap to your size. The seat belt In accordance with current safety
is stowed automatically when not in use. regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle's
Before and after use, ensure that the seat seat belts, go to a qualified workshop with
belt is reeled in correctly. the skills and equipment needed, which a
The lower part of the strap must be PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide. In the event of an impact
positioned as low as possible on the pelvis. Have your seat belts checked regularly by a Depending on the nature and
The upper part must be positioned in the PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, seriousness of the impact, the
hollow of the shoulder. particularly if the straps show signs of pretensioning device may be deployed
The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic damage. before and independently of the airbags.
locking device which comes into operation in Clean the seat belt straps with soapy Deployment of the pretensioners is
the event of a collision, emergency braking water or a textile cleaning product, sold by accompanied by a slight discharge of
or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release PEUGEOT dealers. harmless smoke and a noise, due to the
the device by pulling the strap firmly and After folding or moving a seat or rear bench activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
then releasing it so that it reels in slightly. seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned incorporated in the system.
and reeled in correctly. In all cases, the airbag warning lamp
comes on.
Following an impact, have the seat belts
system checked, and if necessary replaced,
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
125
Safety
Airbags
System designed to contribute towards Front airbags
improving the safety of the occupants (with
the exception of the rear centre passenger)
in the event of violent collisions. The airbags
supplement the action of the force-limiting
seat belts (with the exception of the centre rear
passenger).
If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors
record and analyse the front and side impacts
sustained in the impact detection zones:
- in the case of a serious impact, the airbags
are deployed instantly and contribute
System which protects the driver and front
towards better protection of the occupants Impact detection zones passenger in the event of a serious front impact
of the vehicle (with the exception of the
A. Front impact zone. in order to limit the risk of injury to the head and
rear centre passenger); immediately after
B. Side impact zone. thorax.
the impact, the airbags deflate rapidly so
The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the
that they do not hinder visibility or the exit
steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is
of the occupants,
fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.
- in the case of a minor or rear impact or in Deployment of one or more of the
certain roll-over conditions, the airbags airbags is accompanied by a slight Deployment
may not be deployed; the seat belt emission of smoke and a noise, due The airbags are deployed, except the
alone contributes towards ensuring your to the activation of the pyrotechnic passenger's front airbag if it is deactivated, in the
protection in these situations. cartridge incorporated in the system. event of a serious front impact to all or part of the
This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive front impact zone A, in the longitudinal centreline
The airbags do not operate when the individuals may experience slight of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed
ignition is switched off. irritation. from the front to the rear of the vehicle.
This equipment will only deploy once. The noise of detonation related to the The front airbag inflates between the thorax and
If a second impact occurs (during the deployment of one or more airbags may head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the
same or a subsequent accident), the result in a slight loss of hearing for a steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard,
airbag will not be deployed again. short time. passenger's side to cushion their forward
movement.
126
Safety
To assure the safety of your child, Operating fault

the passenger's front airbag must be If this warning lamp comes on in the
deactivated when you install a rearward instrument panel, you must contact
facing child seat on the front passenger a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
seat. workshop to have the system
Otherwise, the child would risk being checked. The airbags may no longer
seriously injured or killed if the airbag be deployed in the event of a serious
were deployed. impact.
Reactivating the passenger's

front airbag
When you remove the child seat, with the
5
ignition off, turn the switch to the "ON"
position to reactivate the airbag and so assure
Deactivating the passenger's the safety of your front passenger in the event
front airbag of an impact.
Only the passenger's front airbag can be When the ignition is switched on,
deactivated. this warning lamp comes on in the
F With the ignition off, insert the key in the seat belt warning display screen for
passenger airbag deactivation switch. approximately one minute to signal
F Turn it to the "OFF" position. that the front airbag is activated.
F Remove the key keeping the switch in the
new position.
When the ignition is on, this warning
lamp comes in the seat belt warning
display screen. It stays on while the
airbag is deactivated.
127
Safety
Lateral airbags Curtain airbags

System contributing towards greater protection Operating fault
for the the driver and passengers (with the
If this warning lamp comes on in the
exception of the rear centre passenger) in the
instrument panel, you must contact
event of a serious side impact in order to limit
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
the risk of injury to the side of the head.
workshop to have the system
Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and
checked.
the upper passenger compartment area.
The airbags may no longer be deployed in the
Deployment event of a serious impact.
The curtain airbag is deployed at the same
time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the
event of a serious side impact applied to all or
System which protects the driver and front part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular In the event of a minor impact or bump
passenger in the event of a serious side impact to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a on the side of the vehicle or if the
in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest, horizontal plane and directed from the outside vehicle rolls over, the airbags may not
between the hip and the shoulder. towards the inside of the vehicle. be deployed.
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest The curtain airbag inflates between the front or In the event of a rear or front collision,
frame, door side. rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows. none of the lateral airbags is deployed.
Deployment
The lateral airbags are deployed unilaterally in
the event of a serious side impact applied to all
or part of the side impact zone, perpendicular
to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a
horizontal plane and directed from the outside
towards the inside of the vehicle.
The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and
shoulder of the front occupant of the vehicle
and the corresponding door trim panel.
128
Safety
For the airbags to be fully effective, observe the following safety rules:
Sit in a normal upright position. Front airbags Lateral airbags
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.
Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its Use only approved covers on the seats,
Do not leave anything between the
spokes or resting your hands on the centre compatible with the deployment the lateral
occupants and the airbags (a child, pet,
part of the wheel. airbags. For information on the range of seat
object...), nor fix or attach anything close to
Passengers must not place their feet on the covers suitable for your vehicle, you can
the inflation trajectory of the airbags; this
dashboard. contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
could cause injuries during their deployment.
Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags Refer to the "Accessories" section.
Never modify the original definition of your
can cause burns or the risk of injury from a Do not fix or attach anything to the seat
vehicle, particularly in the area directly
cigarette or pipe. backs (clothing...). This could cause injury
around the airbags.
5
Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or to the chest or arms if the lateral airbag is
After an accident or if the vehicle has been
hit it violently. deployed.
stolen or broken into, have the airbag
Do not fit or attach anything to the steering Do not sit with the upper part of the body any
systems checked.
wheel or dashboard, this could cause nearer to the door than necessary.
All work on the airbag system must be
injuries with deployment of the airbags.
carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Even if all of the precautions mentioned
Curtain airbags
are observed, a risk of injury or of minor
burns to the head, chest or arms when an Do not fix or attach anything to the roof. This
airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The could cause injury to the head if the curtain
bag inflates almost instantly (within a few airbag is deployed.
milliseconds) then deflates within the same If fitted on your vehicle, do not remove the
time discharging the hot gas via openings grab handles installed on the roof, they play
provided for this purpose. a part in securing the curtain airbags.
129
Safety
General points relating to child seats

Although one of PEUGEOT main criteria when designing your vehicle, the safety of your children
also depends on you.
For maximum safety, please observe the

PEUGEOT recommends that children
following recommendations:
should travel on the rear seats of your
- in accordance with European regulations,
vehicle:
all children under the age of 12 or less
- rearward facing up to the age of 3,
than one and a half metres tall must
- forward facing over the age of 3.
travel in approved child seats suited to
their weight, on seats fitted with a seat
belt or ISOFIX mountings*,
- statistically, the safest seats in your
vehicle for carrying children are the
rear seats,
- a child weighing less than 9 kg must
travel in the rearward facing position
both in the front and in the rear.
* The regulations on carrying children are

specific to each country. Refer to the
legislation in force in your country.
130
Safety
Child seat at the rear

Rearward facing Forward facing Centre rear seat
A child seat with a support leg must never be
installed on the centre rear passenger seat.
When a rearward facing child seat is installed When a forward facing child seat is installed
5
on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's
front seat forward and straighten the backrest front seat forward and straighten the backrest
so that the rearward facing child seat does not so that the legs of the child in the forward
touch the vehicle's front seat. facing child seat do not touch the vehicle's front
seat.
Ensure that the seat belt is correctly

tensioned.
For child seats with a support leg,
ensure that this is in firm contact with
the floor. If necessary, adjust the front
seat of the vehicle.
131
Safety
Child seat in the front*

Rearward facing Forward facing
When a rearward facing child seat is installed When a forward facing child seat is installed on Passenger seat in the fully back and
on the front passenger seat, adjust the seat the front passenger seat, adjust the vehicle's highest position.
to the fully back and highest position, with the seat to the fully back and highest position
backrest straightened. with seat backrest straightened and leave the
The passenger airbag must be deactivated. passenger's airbag activated.
Otherwise, the child would risk being
seriously injured or killed if the airbag were
to inflate. Ensure that the seat belt is correctly
tensioned.
For child seats with a support leg, ensure
that the support leg is in firm and stable
contact with the floor. If necessary, adjust
the the passenger seat.
* Refer to the legislation in force in your country

before carrying your child in this seating
position.
132
Safety
Deactivating the passenger's front airbag

The warning label present on both sides of the
Never install a rearward facing child
passenger's sun visor repeats this advice.
restraint system on a seat protected by
In line with current legislation, the following
an active front airbag.
tables contain this warning in all of the
This could cause the death of the child
languages required.
or serious injury.
Passenger airbag OFF
For more information on deactivating

the passenger's airbag, refer to the
133
Safety
AR
BG НИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА. Това може да причини
СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето.
CS NIKDY neumisťujte dětské zádržné zařízení orientované směrem dozadu na sedadlo chráněné AKTIVOVANÝM čelním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí
nebezpečí SMRTI DÍTĚTE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRANĚNÍ.
DA Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde, der er beskyttet af en AKTIV AIRBAG. BARNET risikerer at blive ALVORLIGT
KVÆSTET eller DRÆBT.
DE Montieren Sie auf einem Sitz mit AKTIVIERTEM Front-Airbag NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder eine Babyschale entgegen der
Fahrtrichtung, das Kind könnte schwere oder sogar tödliche Verletzungen erleiden.
EL Μη χρησιμοποιείτε ΠΟΤΕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του αυτοκινήτου, σε μια θέση που προστατεύεται από
ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ. Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ
EN NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur
ES NO INSTALAR NUNCA un sistema de retención para niños de espaldas al sentido de la marcha en un asiento protegido mediante un
AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO, ya que podría causar lesiones GRAVES o incluso la MUERTE del niño.
ET Ärge MITTE KUNAGI paigaldage “seljaga sõidusuunas“ lapseistet juhi kõrvalistmele, mille ESITURVAPADI on AKTIVEERITUD.
Turvapadja avanemine võib last TÕSISELT või ELUOHTLIKULT vigastada.
FI ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen
laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.
FR NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l’arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE
frontal ACTIVÉ.
Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l’ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT
HR NIKADA ne postavljati dječju sjedalicu leđima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo zaštićeno UKLJUČENIM prednjim ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM. To bi
moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta.
HU SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést AKTIVÁLT (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen. Ez a
gyermek HALÁLÁT vagy SÚLYOS SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.
IT NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale
ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.
LT NIEKADA neįrenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemonės su atgal atgręžtu vaiku ant sėdynės, kuri saugoma VEIKIANČIOS priekinės ORO
PAGALVĖS. Išsiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali būti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.
134
Safety
LV NEKAD NEuzstādiet uz aizmuguri vērstu bērnu sēdeklīti priekšējā pasažiera sēdvietā, kurā ir AKTIVIZĒTS priekšējais DROŠĪBAS GAISA
SPILVENS.
Tas var izraisīt BĒRNA NĀVI vai radīt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.
MT Qatt m’ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f’siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista’ tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla
NL Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de
airbag kan het KIND LEVENSGEVAARLIJK GEWOND RAKEN
NO Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE,
BARNET risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET.
PL NIGDY nie instalować fotelika dziecięcego w pozycji "tyłem do kierunku jazdy" na siedzeniu wyposażonym w CZOŁOWĄ PODUSZKĘ
POWIETRZNĄ w stanie AKTYWNYM. Może to doprowadzić do ŚMIERCI DZIECKA lub spowodować u niego POWAŻNE OBRAŻENIA
5
CIAŁA.
PT NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO.
Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA.
RO Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG
frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA.
RU ВО ВСЕХ СЛУЧАЯХ ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ использовать обращенное назад детское удерживающее устройство на сиденье,
защищенном ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙ ПОДУШКОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ, установленной перед этим сиденьем.
Это может привести к ГИБЕЛИ РЕБЕНКА или НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ
SK NIKDY neinštalujte detské zádržné zariadenie orientované smerom dozadu na sedadlo chránené AKTIVOVANÝM čelným AIRBAGOM.
Mohlo by dôjsť k SMRTEĽNÉMU alebo VÁŽNEMU PORANENIU DIEŤAŤA.
SL NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega sedeža s hrbtom v smeri vožnje, če je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedežem
AKTIVIRANA. Takšna namestitev lahko povzroči SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POŠKODBE.
SR NIKADA ne koristite dečje sedište koje se okreće unazad na sedištu zaštićenim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer
mogu nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA.
SV Passagerarkrockkudden fram MÅSTE vara avaktiverad om en bakåtvänd bilbarnstol installeras på denna plats. Annars riskerar barnet att
DÖDAS eller SKADAS ALLVARLIGT.
TR KESİNLKLE HAVA YASTIĞI AKTİF olan ön koltuğa yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuğu yerleştirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUĞUN ÖLMESİNE veya
ÇOK AĞIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.
135
Safety
Child seats recommended by PEUGEOT

PEUGEOT offers a range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt.
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L4 L5
L1 "KLIPPAN Optima" "RÖMER KIDFIX"
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus" From 22 kg (approximately 6 years), Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings.
Installed in the rearward facing position. the booster is used on its own. The child is restrained by the seat belt.
136
Safety
Locations for child seats secured with the seat belt

In accordance with the European regulation, this table indicates the options for the installation of child seats secured using the seat belt and universally
approved (a) in relation to the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.
Weight of the child / indicative age
Less than 13 kg From 9 to 18 kg From 15 to 25 kg From 22 to 36 kg

Seat (groups 0 (b) and 0+) (group 1) (group 2) (group 3)
Up to 1 year approx From 1 to 3 years approx From 3 to 6 years approx From 6 to 10 years approx
Front passenger seat (c) (d)

-
-
with height adjustment
without height adjustment
(straightening the backrest)
U (R)
U (R)
U (R)
U (R)
U (R)
U (R)
U (R)
U (R)
5
Hatchback
Outer rear seats (e) U U U U
Centre rear seat (e) U (f) U (f) X X
SW
Outer rear seats (e) U U U U
Centre rear seat (e) X X X X
137
Safety
U Seat suitable for the installation of a child (a) Universal child seat: child seat which can
Remove and stow the head restraint
seat secured using the seat belt and be installed in all vehicles using the seat
before fitting a child seat with a
universally approved rearward facing and/ belt.
backrest to a passenger seat.
or forward facing. (b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant car
Refit the head restraint when the child
U(R) As for U, the vehicle seat must be seats and "car cots" cannot be installed on
seat is removed.
adjusted to the highest and fully back the front passenger seat.
position. (c) Consult the legislation in force in your
X Seat not suitable for the installation of a country before installing your child on this
child seat of the weight group indicated. seat.
(d) When a rearward facing child seat is
installed on the front passenger seat,
the passenger's front airbag must be
deactivated. Otherwise the child risks
being seriously injured or killed if the airbag
is deployed.
When a forward facing child seat is
installed on the front passenger seat, leave
the passenger's front airbag active.
(e) To install a child seat on a rear seat,
rearward or forward facing, move the front
seat forward, then straighten the backrest
to allow enough room for the child seat and
the child's legs.
(f) A child seat with support leg must never be
installed on the centre rear passenger seat.
138
Safety
"ISOFIX" mountings
Your vehicle has been approved in accordance with the latest ISOFIX regulations.
The seats shown below (hatchback version) are fitted with regulation ISOFIX mountings.
There are three rings for each seat. A ring B located in the boot (indicated by a
5
Two rings A, located between the vehicle seat marking), referred to as the TOP TETHER for
back and cushion, indicated by an ISOFIX fixing the upper strap.
marking. The TOP TETHER is used to secure the upper
strap of child seats that have them. This limits
These rings are located behind covers the forward tipping of the child seat in the event
(hatchback). of a frontal impact.
F For access to them, pull forwards The TOP TETHER is located on the boot floor
to unclip the cover and pivot it behind the seat backrest.
upwards.
Do not use the luggage net rings
(hatchback) or lashing rings (SW),
located at the edges of the boot floor.
139
Safety
This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast,

For information regarding the ISOFIX
reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your
child seats which can be installed in
vehicle.
your vehicle, refer to the table showing
The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two
the locations for installing ISOFIX child
latches which are easily secured on the two
seats.
rings A.
Some also have an upper strap which is
attached to ring B.
To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER:

- remove and stow the head restraint before
installing the child seat on the vehicle seat
(refit it when the child seat is removed),
- pass the child seat upper strap over the top
of the seat backrest, centred between the
holes for the head restraint rods,
- attach the upper strap to the ring B,
- tighten the upper strap.
If your vehicle has a spare wheel of the same

size as the four wheels, follow the procedure
below:
The incorrect installation of a child seat
F pass the strap and buckle over the boot
in a vehicle compromises the child's
floor (in the slot),
protection in the event of an accident.
F raise the boot floor,
Observe strictly the fitting instructions
F lift out the upper storage box, located
provided with the child seat.
alongside the wheel,
F attach the spring hook to the TOP TETHER
ring,
F refit the storage box and boot floor.
140
Safety
ISOFIX child seats recommended by PEUGEOT

PEUGEOT offers a range of ISOFIX child seats listed and type approved for your vehicle.
Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's fitting instructions for information on installing and removing the seat.
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus" and its ISOFIX base "Baby P2C Midi" and its ISOFIX base "RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX"
(size category: E) (size categories: D, C, A, B, B1) (size category: B1)
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
5
Is installed only in the forward facing
position.
Is attached to the anchorage rings A and the
upper anchorage ring B, referred to as the
Installed rearward facing using an ISOFIX Installed rearward facing using an ISOFIX
TOP TETHER, using an upper strap.
base which is attached to the rings A. base which is attached to the anchorage
Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining,
The base has a support leg, adjustable for rings A.
lying down.
height, which sits on the vehicle's floor. The base has a support leg, adjustable for
We recommend the lying down position.
This child seat can also be secured with a height, which sits on the vehicle's floor.
This child seat can also be used on seats
seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used This child seat can also be used forward
not equipped with ISOFIX mountings. In
and attached to the vehicle's seat by the facing.
this case, it must be secured to the vehicle's
three-point seat belt. This seat can not be secured with a seat
seat by the three-point seat belt. Adjust the
belt.
position of the vehicle's front seat so that the
We recommend that you use the seat in the
child's feet are not touching the backrest.
rearward facing position up to the age of 3 years.
141
Safety
Locations for ISOFIX child seats

In accordance with European Regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX
mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child
seat next to the ISOFIX logo.
Weight of the child / indicative age
Less than 10 kg
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
(group 0) From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
Less than 13 kg
Up to approx. From approx. 1 to 3 years
(group 0+)
6 months
Up to approx. 1 year
Type of ISOFIX child seat Infant carrier rearward facing rearward facing forward facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1
Front passenger seat Not ISOFIX
Hatchback
IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IUF
Outer rear seats
(a+b) (c) (a) (c) (a) IL-SU
Centre rear seat Not ISOFIX
SW
IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IUF
Outer rear seats
(a+b) (c) (a) (c) (a) IL-SU
Centre rear seat Not ISOFIX
142
Safety
IUF Seat suitable for the installation of an

For more information on the ISOFIX
Isofix Universal seat, Forward facing
mountings and the upper strap, refer to
secured using the upper strap.
IL-SU Seat suitable for the installation of an
Isofix Semi-Universal seat either:
- rearward facing fitted with an upper
strap or a support leg, Remove and stow the head restraint
- forward facing fitted with a support leg, before fitting a child seat with a
5
- an infant car seat fitted with an upper backrest to a passenger seat.
strap or a support leg. Refit the head restraint when the child
seat is removed.
X Seat not suitable for the installation of a
child seat of the weight group indicated.
(a) Move a seat without height adjustment
forwards by 1 notch from the mid
position forwards and backwards. A
seat with height adjustment must be in
the highest position.
(b) The installation of an infant carrier on
one of the outer seats makes use of the
other two seats impossible.
(c) A seat with height adjustment must be
placed in the highest position. Move the
seat without height adjustment forward
by 5 notches from the mid-position
forwards and backwards.
143
Safety
Recommendations
Child seats Installing a booster
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a For optimum installation of the forward facing cushion
vehicle compromises the child's protection in child seat, ensure that the back of the child The chest part of the seat belt must be
the event of an accident. seat is as close as possible to the backrest positioned on the child's shoulder without
Check that there is no seat belt or seat belt of the vehicle's seat, or in contact if possible. touching the neck.
buckle under the child seat as this could The head restraint must be removed before Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
destabilise it. installing a child seat with a backrest on the passes correctly over the child's thighs.
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the passenger seat. PEUGEOT recommends the use of a booster
child seat harnesses keeping the slack in Ensure that the head restraint is stowed or seat which has a back, fitted with a seat belt
relation to the child's body to a minimum, attached securely so that it is not thrown guide at shoulder level.
even for short journeys. around the vehicle in the event of sharp
For the installation of a child seat using a braking.
seat belt, ensure that this is well tensioned Refit the head restraint as soon as the child As a safety precaution, do not leave:
on the child seat and that it is holding the seat is removed. - one or more children alone and
child seat firmly against the seat of your unsupervised in a vehicle,
vehicle. If your front passenger seat is - a child or an animal in a vehicle which
adjustable, move it forward if necessary. Children at the front is exposed to the sun, with the windows
At the rear seats, always leave sufficient The legislation on carrying a child on the closed,
space between the front seat and: front passenger seat is specific to each - the keys within reach of children inside
- a rearward facing child seat, country. Refer to the legislation in force in the vehicle.
- the feet of a child seated in a forward the country in which you are driving. To prevent accidental opening of the doors,
facing child seat. Deactivate the passenger's front airbag use the child lock.
For this, move the front seat forward and if when a rearward facing child seat is installed Take care not to open the rear windows by
necessary straighten its backrest. on the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the more than one third.
child would risk being seriously injured or To protect young children from the rays of
killed if the airbag were deployed. the sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.
144
Safety
Child lock
This mechanical system prevents opening of a rear door using its interior control.
The control is located on the edge of each rear door and locking is independent for each door.
5
Locking Unlocking
F Using the integral ignition key, turn the F Using the integral ignition key, turn the
control as far as it will go: control as far as it will go:
- to the left on the left-hand rear door, - to the right on the left-hand rear door,
- to the right on the right-hand rear door. - to the left on the right-hand rear door.
145
Driving
A few driving recommendations

Observe the driving regulations at all times and If you are obliged to drive through water: Important!
remain vigilant whatever the traffic conditions.
Pay close attention to the traffic and keep your Never drive with the parking brake
hands on the wheel so that you are ready to applied - Risk of overheating and
react at any time to any eventuality. damage to the braking system!
On a long journey, a break every two hours is Do not park or run the engine when
strongly recommended. stationary in areas where inflammable
In difficult weather, drive smoothly, anticipate substances and materials (dry grass,
the need to brake and increase the distance dead leaves...) might come into contact
from other vehicles. with the hot exhaust system - Risk of
fire!
- check that the depth of water does not
exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves
that might be generated by other users,
- deactivate the Stop & Start system,
- drive as slowly as possible without
Driving on flooded stalling. In all cases, do not exceed 6 mph Never leave a vehicle unsupervised
roads (10 km/h), with the engine running. If you have
- do not stop and do not switch off the to leave your vehicle with the engine
We strongly advise against driving on flooded engine. running, apply the parking brake
roads, as this could cause serious damage On leaving the flooded road, as soon as and put the gearbox into neutral or
to the engine or gearbox, as well as to the circumstances allow, make several light brake position N or P, depending on the type
electrical systems of your vehicle. applications to dry the brake discs and pads. of gearbox.
If in doubt on the state of your vehicle, contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
146
Driving
When towing
Distribution of loads Cooling Braking
F Distribute the load in the trailer so that the Towing a trailer on a slope increases the Towing a trailer increases the braking distance.
heaviest items are as close as possible to temperature of the coolant. To avoid overheating of the brakes, the use of
the axle and the nose weight approaches As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling engine braking is recommended.
the maximum permitted without capacity is not dependent on the engine speed.
exceeding it. F To lower the engine speed, reduce your
Air density decreases with altitude, thus speed.
reducing engine performance. Above The maximum towed load on a long incline
1 000 metres, the maximum towed load must depends on the gradient and the ambient Tyres
be reduced by 10 % for every 1 000 metres of temperature.
F Check the tyre pressures of the towing
altitude. In all cases, keep a check on the coolant
vehicle and of the trailer, observing the
6
temperature.
recommended pressures.
For more information on weights (and
the towed loads which apply to your
F If the warning lamp and the
vehicle) refer to the corresponding Lighting
STOP warning lamp come on,
section. F Check the electrical lighting and signalling
stop the vehicle and switch off
the engine as soon as possible. on the trailer and the hadlamp beam height
of your vehicle.
For more information on adjusting the
Side wind headlamp beam height, refer to the
F Take into account the increased sensitivity corresponding section.
to side wind.
The rear parking sensors will be

deactivated automatically if a genuine
PEUGEOT towbar is used.
147
Driving
Starting-switching off the engine, remote control

Put the gear lever into neutral.
Ignition switch Starting using the key

The parking brake must be applied.
F With a manual gearbox, place the gear F Insert the key in the ignition switch.
lever in neutral then fully depress the clutch The system recognises the starting code.
pedal. F Unlock the steering column by
simultaneously turning the steering wheel
and the key.
1. Stop position.
In certain circumstances, you may have
2. Ignition on position.
to apply some force to turn the wheels
3. Starting position.
(if the wheels are against a kerb, for
example).
F With an automatic gearbox, place the gear

lever in position N or P then firmly press
the brake pedal.
148
Driving
In wintry conditions, the pre-heater warning

lamp will stay on for a longer period.
When the engine is hot, the warning lamp
does not come on.
If the engine does not start straight

away, switch off the ignition.
Wait a few moments before trying
again. If the engine does not start after
6
a few attempts, do not keep trying: you
F With a petrol engine, operate the starter F With a Diesel engine, turn the key to risk damaging the starter motor and the
motor by turning the key to position 3 position 2, ignition on, to operates the engine.
until the engine starts, without pressing engine pre-heating. Call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a
the accelerator. Once the engine starts, qualified workshop.
release the key. F Wait until this warning lamp
goes off in the instrument panel
then operate the starter motor
by turning the key to position 3
until the engine starts, without In temperate conditions, do not leave
pressing the accelerator. Once the engine running to warm up, but set
the engine starts, release off straight away and drive at moderate
the key. speed.
149
Driving
Switching off using the key

Never leave the engine running in F Immobilise the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, remove the
an enclosed area without adequate F Turn the key fully towards you to key and lock the doors.
ventilation: internal combustion position 1 (Stop).
engines emit toxic exhaust gases, F Remove the key from the ignition switch.
such as carbon monoxide. Danger of F To lock the steering column, turn the
intoxication and death. steering wheel until it locks.
In very severe wintry conditions Switching off the engine leads to a loss
(temperatures below -23°C), to ensure of braking assistance.
the correct operation and the durability To facilitate unlocking of the steering
of the mechanical components of your wheel, it is recommended that you
vehicle, the engine and gearbox, it is place the wheels in the straight ahead
necessary to leave the engine running position before switching off the engine. Avoid attaching heavy objects to the
for 4 minutes before moving off. key, which would weigh down on its
blade in the ignition switch and could
F Check that the parking brake is cause a malfunction.
correctly applied, particularly
when parking on a slope.
● With a manual parking brake,
the lever must be pulled up. Key left in the "Ignition on"
● With an electric parking brake, position
the indicator lamp in the
If the key has been left in the ignition switch
control lever must be on.
at position 2 (Ignition on), the ignition will
be switched off automatically after one hour.
To switch the ignition back on, turn the
Never switch off the ignition until the vehicle key to position 1 (Stop), then back to
has been brought to a complete stop. position 2 (Ignition on).
150
Driving
Starting and switching off the engine,

"Keyless Entry and Starting"
Starting
For Diesel vehicles, in sub- The presence in the recognition zone of
zero temperatures the engine the electronic key of the "Keyless Entry
will not start until the pre-heater and Starting" system is essential. For
warning lamp has gone off. reasons of safety, do not leave this zone
If this warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
after pressing the "START/ A message is displayed if the electronic
STOP" button, press down on key is not detected in the zone. Move
the brake or clutch pedal until the electronic key into the zone to be
the warning lamp goes off, able to start the engine.
without pressing the "START/
6
STOP" button again, until the
F With the electronic key inside the vehicle, engine starts and runs.
depress the clutch pedal fully and maintain
pressure until the engine starts.
If one of the starting conditions is not
F Press the "START/STOP" met, a reminder message appears in
button. the instrument panel screen. In some
circumstances, it is necessary to
turn the steering wheel slightly while
F The steering column unlocks and the pressing the "START/STOP" button
engine starts more or less immediately. to assist unlocking of the steering;
(Read the information on Diesel versions). a message warns you when this is
needed.
151
Driving
Switching off Ignition on position

(accessories)
F Immobilise the vehicle.
If you use the accessory position for too
F With the electronic key inside long, the system automatically goes into
the vehicle, press the "START/ economy mode to avoid the risk of a flat
STOP" button. battery.
The engine stops and the steering column is
locked.
If the vehicle is not immobilised,

the engine will not stop.
Pressing the "START/STOP" button, with no

action on the pedals, allows the ignition to
be switched on and so activate the ancillary
equipment.
F Press the "START/STOP" button,

the instrument panel comes on
but the engine does not start.
F Press the button again to switch off the

ignition and so allow the vehicle to be
locked.
152
Driving
Emergency starting Emergency switch-off Remote control not

recognised
In the event of an emergency only, the engine

can be switched of without conditions. To do
this, press and hold the "START/STOP" button
for about 3 seconds.
In this case the steering column locks as soon
6
as the vehicle stops.
If the electronic key is no longer in the

recognition zone when you close a door or
when you (later) request switching off the
engine, a message appears in the instrument
panel.
When the electronic key is in the recognition

zone and your vehicle does not start after Key left in reader
pressing the "START/STOP" button: You are warned by a message if the
F Press and hold the "START/STOP" button
F Insert the electronic key in the reader. electronic key is is still in the reader on
for about 3 seconds if you want to force
F Fully declutch. opening the driver's door.
switching off the engine.
F Press the "START/STOP" button.
The engine starts.
153
Driving
Anti-theft protection Manual parking brake

Electronic engine immobiliser When parking on a slope, direct your
The keys contain an electronic chip which has wheels against the kerb, apply the
a secret code. When the ignition is switched parking brake, engage a gear and
on, this code must be recognised in order for switch off the ignition.
starting to be possible.
This electronic engine immobiliser locks the
engine management system a few minutes
after the ignition is switched off and prevents Pressing the brake pedal facilitates the
starting of the engine by anyone who does not application and release of the manual
have the key. parking brake.
In the event of a malfunction, you are informed
by a message in the instrument panel screen. Application
In this case, your vehicle does not start; contact
a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible. F With your foot on the brake pedal, pull the
parking brake lever up to immobilise your
vehicle.
For reasons of safety and theft
protection, do not leave your electronic
key in the vehicle, even when you are Release
close to it.
F With your foot on the brake pedal, pull the
parking brake lever up gently, press the
It is recommended that you keep it on your person.
release button then lower the lever fully.
When the vehicle is being driven, this

warning lamp coming on, accompanied
by an audible signal and a message,
indicates that the parking brake is still
on or has not been fully released.
154
Driving
Electric parking brake

The driver can take over at any time to apply
In the event of a battery failure, the
or release the parking brake, by operating the
electric parking brake no longer works.
control lever.
As a safety measure, if the parking
brake is not applied, immobilise the
- By briefly pulling the control vehicle by engaging a gear (with a
lever to apply the brake, manual gearbox) or placing a chock at
one of the wheels.
- By briefly pushing qualified workshop.
The system allows the application of the the control lever, while
parking brake on switching off the engine and pressing the foot
release as the vehicle moves off. brake, to release.
6
The indicator lamp in the control lever Never leave a child alone inside the
Indicator lamp flashes during manual application or vehicle with the ignition on, as they
release. could release the parking brake.
This indicator lamp comes on in the
instrument panel and in the control
lever to confirm the application of the
parking brake. When towing, parking on a steep slope,
or if your vehicle is heavily laden,
turn the wheels towards the kerb and
It goes off to confirm the release of the parking engage a gear.
brake. For towing, you vehicle is approved for
parking on slopes of up to 12%.
155
Driving
Automatic release Automatic application

Ensure first that the engine is running and the The complete release of the parking With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake is
driver's door is properly closed. brake is confirmed by the brake automatically applied when the ignition is
The electric parking brake releases indicator lamp and the P indicator switched off.
automatically and progressively when you lamp in the control lever going off,
press the accelerator : accompanied by the display of the Application of of the parking brake
message "Parking brake released". is confirmed by illumination of the
brake indicator lamp and the P
With a manual gearbox indicator lamp in the control lever,
When stationary with the engine running, do not accompanied by the display of the
depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily, you message "Parking brake applied".
F Fully depress the clutch pedal, engage 1 st
risk releasing the parking brake.
or reverse gear.
F Press the accelerator pedal and release With the engine stalled or in STOP
the clutch pedal. mode of Stop & Start, automatic
application does not take place.
With an automatic gearbox

With automatic operation, you can
manually apply or release the parking
F Select position D, M or R.
brake using the control lever.
F Press the accelerator pedal.
156
Driving
Manual release Manual application Recommendations

With the ignition on or the engine running, to With the vehicle stationary: briefly pull the control lever.
Label on door panel
release the parking brake: Confirmation of the instruction is signaled by
F press the brake pedal, flashing of the indicator lamp in the control
F briefly push the control lever. lever.
The complete release of the parking brake Application of of the parking brake
is confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and is confirmed by illumination of the
the P indicator lamp in the control lever going brake indicator lamp and the P
off, accompanied by the display of a message indicator lamp in the control lever,
and an audible signal until the doors are accompanied by the display of a
closed. message.
Before leaving the vehicle, check that
parking brake is applied: the indicator
6
If you push the control lever without lamps in the instrument panel and
pressing the brake pedal, the parking the control lever must be on fixed, not
brake will not be released and a flashing.
message is displayed. If the parking brake is not applied, there
is an audible signal and a message is
displayed on opening the driver's door.
The area in front of the electric parking

brake control is not intended for the
storage of objects.
157
Driving
Immobilising the vehicle Parking the vehicle with the

with the engine running parking brake released
To immobilise the vehicle with the engine F Release the parking brake manually by
In very cold conditions (risk of
running, briefly pull the control lever. pushing the control lever while keeping
freezing), recovery, carwash tunnel, it
your foot on the brake.
is recommended that the parking brake
Application of of the parking brake not be applied.
is confirmed by illumination of the The complete release of the parking
brake indicator lamp and the P To immobilise your vehicle, engage a brake is confirmed by the brake
indicator lamp in the control lever, gear or fit a chock to one of the wheels. indicator lamp and the P indicator
accompanied by the display of a lamp in the control lever going off,
message. accompanied by the display of a
message.
F Switch off the engine.
Application of the parking brake is confirmed
F Switch off the ignition.
by illumination of of the indicator lamps in the
instrument panel and the control lever.
F Switch the ignition on again, without
starting the engine.
158
Driving
Deactivating automatic operation Emergency braking

In some situations, such as very cold weather From this point the parking brake can only
The emergency braking should only be
or towing (caravan, recovery), it may be be applied and released manually using the
used in an exceptional situation.
necessary to deactivate automatic operation of control lever.
the system.
F Start the engine.
Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic In the event of a failure of the main service
F Apply the parking brake with the control
operation. brake or in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver
lever, if it is released.
Reactivation of automatic operation is taken ill, under instruction, etc) a continuous
F Take your foot off the brake pedal.
confirmed by the indicator lamp in the pull on the control lever will brake the vehicle.
F Push and hold the control lever in the
instrument panel going off. Braking takes place while the control lever is
release direction for at least 10 seconds
being pulled. It is interrupted if the control lever
and no more than 15 seconds.
is released.
F Release the control lever.
The ABS and DSC systems provide stability of
6
F Press and hold the brake pedal.
the vehicle during emergency braking.
F Pull the control lever in the apply direction
If the emergency braking malfunctions, the
for 2 seconds.
message "Parking brake control faulty" will be
displayed.
Deactivation of the automatic functions

is confirmed by illumination of this
indicator lamp in the instrument panel. If a failure of the ABS and DSC systems,
F Release the control lever and the brake signalled by the illumination of one or both
pedal. warning lamps in the instrument panel, then
stability of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed.
In this event, stability must be assured by the
driver by repeating alternate “pull-release”
actions on the control lever until the vehicle is
immobilised.
159
Driving
Operating faults
The various alert situations are described in this table.
In the event of a fault with the electric parking brake it is recommended that you contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
Situation Consequences
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and this - Automatic release is not available.
warning lamp. - If you attempt an automatic release, a help message is displayed on acceleration
when the parking brake is applied, prompting you to use manual release.
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these - Back-up braking does not have full power.
warning lamps. - If automatic release is not available, a help message is displayed on acceleration
when the parking brake is applied, prompting you to use manual release.
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these - Automatic application is not available: use the control lever.
warning lamps. - The electric parking brake can only be used manually.
- If automatic release is also not available, a help message is displayed on
acceleration when the parking brake is applied, prompting you to use manual
release.
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these - If manual application and release do not work, the control lever is faulty.
warning lamps. - The automatic functions must be used in all circumstances: they are
automatically reactivated in the event of failure of the control lever.
- You can no longer immobilise the vehicle with the engine running.
160
Driving
Situation Consequences
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these The parking brake is faulty, the manual and automatic functions may not operate.
warning lamps. When stationary, to immobilise your vehicle:
F pull and hold the control lever for about 7 to 15 seconds, until the warning lamp
comes on in the instrument panel.
If this procedure does not work, you should make your vehicle safe:
F park on a level surface,
F engage a gear,
F if possible, fit a wheel chock.
Call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these - The parking brake does not have its full performance to securely hold the vehicle
6
warning lamps. in all situations.
You should make your vehicle safe:
- park on a level surface,
- engage a gear,
- if possible, fit a wheel chock.
Call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
The flashing of the P warning lamps on starting the vehicle indicates that the parking
brake is not correctly applied.
As soon as possible, stop the vehicle and try to completely release the parking brake,
using the control lever, with your foot on the brake pedal.
Display of the message "Battery fault" and this warning - The state of charge of the battery is very low and requires immobilisation of the
lamp. vehicle in a safe place.
- Once the battery is completely discharged, the controls do not operate: to
release the parking brake, call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
161
Driving
Hill start assist

System which keeps your vehicle immobilised Operation
temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when
starting on a gradient, the time it takes to move your
foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.
This system is either not available or is
standard.
It only operates when:
- the vehicle is completely stationary, with
your foot on the brake pedal,
- particular conditions on a slope are met,
- with the driver’s door closed.
This hill start assist system cannot be
deactivated.
On an ascending slope, with the vehicle On a descending slope, with the vehicle
Do not leave the vehicle while it is being
stationary, the vehicle is held for a momentarily stationary and reverse gear engaged, the
held in the hill start assist phase.
when you release the brake pedal: vehicle is held momentarily when you
If you need to get out of the vehicle with
- if you are in first gear or neutral with a release the brake pedal.
the engine running, apply the parking
manual gearbox,
brake manually then ensure that the
- if you are in position D or M with an
parking brake indicator lamp (and the P
automatic gearbox. Operating fault
indicator lamp in the electric parking
brake control lever) are on fixed (not
flashing).
If a fault in the system occurs, this warning

lamp comes on accompanied by a message.
workshop to have the system checked.
162
Driving
5-speed manual 6-speed manual gearbox

gearbox
Engaging reverse Engaging 5th or Engaging reverse
gear 6th gear gear
F With clutch pedal fully down, place the gear

lever in neutral.
F Move the lever fully to the right to engage
5th or 6th gear.
F Raise the ring under the knob and move
the gear lever to the left then forwards.
6
F Push the gear lever to the right then
backwards.
Failure to follow this advice may cause
permanent damage to the gearbox Only engage reverse gear when the
Only engage reverse gear when the (engagement of 3rd or 4th gear by vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle. mistake).
As a safety precaution and to facilitate

As a safety precaution and to facilitate
starting of the engine:
starting of the engine:
- always select neutral,
- always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.
- press the clutch pedal.
163
Driving
Gear shift indicator

System which reduces fuel consumption by recommending the most suitable gear.
Operation
Depending on the driving situation and your Example:
vehicle's equipment, the system may advise
you to skip one or more gears.
You can follow this instruction without going
through the intermediate gears.
On certain Diesel versions with

manual gearbox, the system may
suggest changing into neutral (N is
displayed in the instrument panel) so
that the engine can go into standby - You are in third gear. - The system may suggest that you engage
(STOP mode with Stop & Start), in a higher gear.
certain driving conditions.
The information appears in the instrument
panel in the form of an arrow.
The gear engagement recommendations must On vehicles with manual gearbox, the arrow
not be considered compulsory. can be accompanied by the recommended
This is because the configuration of the road, gear.
traffic density and safety remain important
factors in the choice of the best gear.
The system adapts its gear change
The gear shift indicator system does not
recommendation according to the
replace the need for vigilance on the part of the - You press the accelerator pedal. driving conditions (slope, load, ...) and
driver.
the demands of the driver (power,
acceleration, braking, ...).
The system never suggests:
- engaging first gear,
This function cannot be deactivated. - engaging reverse gear.
164
Driving
Automatic gearbox
Six speed automatic gearbox which offers a Gear selection gate Steering mounted controls*
choice between the comfort of fully automatic
operation, enhanced by sport and snow
programmes, or manual gear changing.
Two driving modes are offered:
- automatic operation for electronic
management of the gears by the gearbox,
● with the sport programme for a more
dynamic style of driving,
● or the snow programme to improve
driving when traction is poor,
- manual operation for sequential changing P. Park.
of the gears by the driver. - Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake
on or off.
6
- Starting the engine. Pull on the right hand steering mounted
R. Reverse. control paddle to change up.
Gear selector - Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle stationary,
Pull on the left hand steering mounted control
engine at idle.
paddle to change down.
N. Neutral.
- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake
on. The steering mounted control paddles
- Starting the engine. cannot be used to select neutral or to
D. Automatic operation. select or come out of reverse.
M.+ / - Manual operation

Sequential changing of the six gears.
F Pull towards the + sign and release to
change up through the gears.
or
1. "S" (sport) programme switch. F Push towards the - sign and release to
2. "T" (snow) programme switch. change down through the gears.
* Depending on version.
165
Driving
Displays in the instrument panel Moving off
F With your foot on the brake,

When the engine is running at idle, with
select position P or N.
the brakes released, if position R, D or
M is selected, the vehicle moves even
F Start the engine. without the accelerator being pressed.
If the conditions are not met, there is an audible When the engine is running, never
signal, accompanied by a message in the leave children in the vehicle without
instrument panel screen. supervision.
F With the engine running, press the brake When carrying out maintenance with
pedal. the engine running, apply the parking
F Release the parking brake, unless it is brake and select position P.
programmed to automatic mode.
When you move the gear selector in the gate F Select position R, D or M.
to select a position, the corresponding symbol F Gradually release the brake pedal.
appears in the instrument panel. The vehicle moves off.
P. Park
R. Reverse
N. Neutral
D. Drive (automatic operation
S. Sport programme If position N is engaged inadvertently
T. Snow programme while driving, allow the engine to
1 to 6. Gear engaged during manual operation return to idle then engage position D to
-. Invalid value during manual operation accelerate.
166
Driving
Automatic operation Sport and snow programmes Creep function (moving

These two special programmes supplement the without using the
F Select position D for automatic changing automatic operation in very specific conditions accelerator)
of the six gears. of use.
This function provides great flexibility in
The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive Sport "S" manoeuvring the vehicle at low speed (when
mode, without any intervention on the part
F Press the "S" switch, after starting the engine. parking, in traffic jams, …).
of the driver. It continuously selects the most
The gearbox automatically favours a dynamic style With the engine at idle, parking brake released
suitable gear according to the style of driving,
of driving. and position D, M or R selected, the vehicle
the profile of the road and the load in the
S appears in the instrument panel. moves as soon as you take your foot off
vehicle.
the brake pedal (even without pressing the
For maximum acceleration, without touching
accelerator).
the gear selector press the accelerator pedal
For your safety, this function will be activated
down fully (kick-down). The gearbox changes If you vehicle is equipped with the "Dynamic
only if you press the brake pedal when
6
down automatically or maintains the gear function", refer to the section covering this,
which is part of sport mode. changing from forward drive to reverse.
selected until the maximum engine speed is
It is deactivated on opening the driver's door.
reached. Snow "T"
Closing the door then pressing the brake or
On braking, the gearbox changes down F Press the "T" switch, after starting the accelerator pedal, reactivates the function.
automatically to provide efficient engine engine.
braking. The gearbox adapts to driving on slippery
If you release the accelerator sharply, the roads.
gearbox will not change to a higher gear for This programme improves starting and drive
safety reasons. when traction is poor.
T appears in the instrument panel.
Never leave children inside the vehicle
without supervision when the engine is
Never select position N while the
running.
vehicle is moving. Return to automatic operation
Never select positions P or R unless the
F At any time, press the button selected
vehicle is completely stationary.
(S or "T") again at any time to quit the
programme engaged and return to auto-
adaptive mode.
167
Driving
Manual operation Operating fault
F Select position M for sequential changing Invalid value during manual When the ignition is on, a message
of the six gears. operation appears in the instrument panel
F Pull towards the + sign and release to screen to indicate a gearbox fault.
change up a gear. This symbol is displayed if a gear is
F Push towards the - sign and release to not engaged correctly (gear selector In this case, the gearbox switches to back-up
change down a gear. between two positions). mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may feel
It is only possible to change from one gear to a substantial knock when changing from P
another if the vehicle speed and engine speed to R and from N to R. This will not cause any
damage to the gearbox.
permit; otherwise, the gearbox will operate Stopping the vehicle Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h), local speed
temporarily in automatic mode. restrictions permitting.
Before switching off the engine, you can
engage position P or N to place the gearbox in Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
D disappears and the gears neutral.
engaged appear in succession in the In both cases, apply the parking brake to You risk damaging the gearbox:
instrument panel. immobilise the vehicle, unless it is programmed - if you press the accelerator and
to automatic mode. brake pedals at the same time,
If the engine speed is too low or too high, the - if you force the lever from position P
gear selected flashes for a few seconds, then to another position when the
the actual gear engaged is displayed. battery is flat.
It is possible to change from position D If the selector lever is not in position P,
(automatic) to position M (manual) at any time. when the driver's door is opened or
When the vehicle is stationary or moving approximately 45 seconds after the
very slowly, the gearbox selects gear M1 ignition is switched off, there is an To reduce fuel consumption when
automatically. audible signal and a message appears. stationary for long periods with the
The sport and snow programmes do not F Return the selector lever to engine running (traffic jam...), position
operate in manual mode. position P; the audible signal stops the selector lever at N and apply the
and the message disappears. parking brake, unless it is programmed
in automatic mode.
168
Driving
Dynamic pack
This pack conditions:
- the visual ambience, with specific back-
lighting for the instrument panel,
- the acoustic ambience of the engine,
- the power assistance for the steering,
- acceleration,
- information to the driver in the instrument
panel on dynamic settings.
With an automatic gearbox, gear

changes are faster.
Activation Display
F Press and hold the button until the back- F Press the end of the wiper control stalk to
6
This function is only available when
lighting in the instrument panel changes. display in the instrument panel the different
Park Assist is not selected and snow
The LED in the button stays on. information on dynamic settings.
mode in the automatic gearbox is not
selected.
If Park Assist is switched on, this If the LED flashes, activation is not
automatically deactivates the function. possible (for example if Park Assist
or snow mode is selected) and so
the back-lighting returns to its normal
mode.
If the LED continues flashing for a long
time, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
The telemetry data (longitudinal and

lateral acceleration, power produced,
turbocharger pressure, ...) are given as
an indication only. F Press repeatedly to go from one screen to
another.
169
Driving
Stop & Start

The Stop & Start system puts the engine temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams, or other...).
The engine restarts automatically - START mode - as soon as you want to move off. The restart takes place instantly, quickly and
silently.
Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions as well as the noise level when stationary.
Operation
Going into engine STOP mode For your comfort, during parking Special cases: STOP mode not
manoeuvres, STOP mode is not available
The "ECO" warning lamp comes on available for a few seconds after STOP mode is not invoked principally when:
in the instrument panel and the engine coming out of reverse gear. - the vehicle is on a steep slope (up or down),
goes into standby automatically: STOP mode does not affect the - the driver's door is open,
- With a manual gearbox, at speeds below functionality of the vehicle, such as for - the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
12 mph (20 km/h) or vehicle stationary example, braking, power steering... - the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph
(depending on the engine), when you place A slight delay between the vehicle (10 km/h) since the last engine start by the
the gear lever in neutral, and you release stopping and the engine cutting out may driver,
the clutch pedal. be noticed. - the electric parking brake is applied or
being applied,
- With an automatic gearbox, vehicle - the engine is needed to maintain a
stationary, when you press the brake comfortable temperature in the passenger
pedal or place the gear selector lever in compartment,
position N. Never refuel with the engine in STOP - demisting is active,
mode; you must switch off the ignition - some special conditions (battery charge,
Stop & Start time with the button. engine temperature, braking assistance,
counter ambient temperature...) where the engine is
needed to assure control of a system.
(minutes / seconds or hours / minutes)
If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start,
In this case, the "ECO" warning
a time counter calculates the time spent
lamp flashes for a few seconds then
in STOP mode during a journey.
goes off.
It resets to zero every time the ignition is This operation is perfectly normal.
switched on.
170
Driving
Deactivation / Reactivation
Going into engine START mode Special cases: START invoked
automatically
The "ECO" warning lamp goes off START mode is invoked automatically
and the engine starts automatically: when:
- With a manual gearbox, when you fully - you open the driver's door,
depress the clutch pedal. - you unfasten the driver's seat belt,
- the speed of the vehicle exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) or 2 mph (3 km/h) (depending on
- With an automatic gearbox: the engine) with a manual gearbox, At any time, press the "ECO OFF" switch to
● gear selector in position D or M, when - the speed of the vehicle exceeds 2 mph deactivate the system.
you release the brake pedal, (3 km/h) with an automatic gearbox, This is confirmed by the switch warning lamp
6
● or gear selector in position N and brake - the electric parking brake is being applied, coming on accompanied by a message.
pedal released, when you place the gear - some special conditions (battery charge,
selector in position D or M, engine temperature, braking assistance, If the system has been deactivated
● or when you engage reverse. ambient temperature...) where the engine is in STOP mode, the engine restarts
needed for control of a system. immediately.
Press the "ECO OFF" switch again.

The system is active again; this is confirmed
by the switch warning lamp going off,
In this case the "ECO" warning lamp accompanied by a message.
flashes for a few seconds, then goes
off.
This operation is perfectly normal. The system is reactivated automatically
at every new engine start by the driver.
171
Driving
Operating fault Maintenance
Before doing anything under the

bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start
system to avoid any risk of injury
resulting from automatic operation of
START mode.
This system requires a 12 V battery with a

special specification and technology (reference
numbers available from PEUGEOT dealers).
Fitting a battery not listed by PEUGEOT
introduces the risk of malfunction of the
system.
In the event of a fault with the system, this
For charging, use a 12 V charger and do not
warning lamp comes on continuously.
reverse the polarity.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
In the event of a fault in STOP mode, the
vehicle may stall.
All of the instrument panel warning lamps
come on.
Depending on version, an alert message may
The Stop & Start system makes use of
also be displayed, asking you to place the gear
advanced technology. For any work on
lever in position N and put your foot on the
the system go to a qualified workshop
brake pedal.
with the skills and equipment required,
You must switch off the ignition, then start the
which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to
engine again.
provide.
172
Driving
Memorising speeds
Touch screen
This function allows speeds to be saved, which can then be offered to set the two systems: the speed limiter (to limit the speed of the vehicle) or the
cruise control (for a vehicle cruising speed).
You can memorise up to six speed settings for each of the two systems. By default, some speed settings are already memorised.
Memorising
This function is accessible in the touch screen.
F Select the "Driving assistance" menu.
F In the secondary page, press
6
"Speed settings".
F Select the system for which you want to F Enter the new value using the numerical
For safety reasons, the driver must
memorise new speed settings: keypad and confirm.
carry out these operations when
F Confirm to save the modification and quit
stationary.
● speed limiter the menu.
or This button allows you to restore the

factory settings.
● cruise control.
F Press the button corresponding to the

speed setting you want to modify.
173
Driving
Speed limiter "LIMIT"

System which prevents the vehicle from exceeding the speed programmed by the driver.
Once the programmed speed limit is reached, Steering mounted controls Displays in the instrument panel
additional pressure on the accelerator pedal
has no effect.
S witching on the speed limiter requires

a programmed speed of at least 20 mph
(30 km/h).
The speed limiter is paused by operation of the
control.
The programmed speed can be exceeded
temporarily by pressing the accelerator firmly
beyond the point of resistance.
To return to the programmed speed, simply
release the accelerator pedal until the vehicle 1. Select speed limiter mode. 6. Speed limiter on / pause indication.
returns to the programmed speed limit. 2. Decrease programmed speed. 7. Speed limiter mode selection indication.
3. Increase programmed speed. 8. Speed value setting.
4. Speed limiter on / pause.
5. Display the list of memorised speeds.
The programmed speed remains in the

memory when the ignition is switched off. For more information on memorising speeds,
The speed limiter cannot, in any

circumstances, replace the need to observe
speed limits, nor can it replace the need for
vigilance on the part of the driver.
174
Driving
Switching on / Pause Adjusting the speed limiter

setting
- pressing button 5:
F the six speeds memorised are displayed
in the touch screen,
F press the button corresponding to the
speed limit chosen
The value is displayed in the instrument
panel.
The selection screen closes after a
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on few moments.
6
in order to set the speed.
F Turn thumb thumb wheel 1 to the "LIMIT" Once the function is selected, you can modify
position: the speed limiter mode is selected the speed setting by:
but is not switched on (Pause). - using buttons 2 and 3, increasing or
F Switch the speed limiter back on by decreasing the speed displayed:
pressing button 4, if the speed displayed F by successive short presses, to modify
is suitable (by default, the last speed by + or - ½ mph (1 km/h),
programmed). F by a maintained press, to modify in steps
F You can temporarily stop the the speed of + or - 3 mph (5 km/h).
limiter by pressing button 4 again: the
display confirms that it has been stopped
(Pause).
175
Driving
Temporarily exceeding the Operating fault On sharp acceleration, as when

programmed speed descending a steep hill, the speed
limiter will not be able to prevent
F Press firmly on the accelerator pedal, Flashing of the dashes indicates a fault with the
the vehicle from exceeding the
going beyond the point of resistance, to speed limiter.
programmed speed.
exceed the programmed speed limit. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
The limiter is temporarily deactivated
The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily qualified workshop.
and the displayed programmed speed
and the displayed programmed speed flashes.
flashes.
An audible signal accompanies the flashing
An audible signal accompanies the
of the programmed speed when exceeding
flashing of the programmed speed
the speed is not due to an action by the driver
when exceeding the speed is not due to
(steep hill...).
an action by the driver.
As soon as the vehicle's speed returns to the
The use of mats not approved by
programmed value, the limiter operates again:
PEUGEOT may interfere with the
the display of the programmed speed becomes
operation of the speed limiter.
steady again.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- ensure that the mat is secured
correctly,
Switching off
- do not fit one mat on top of another.
F Turn wheel 1 to the "0" position.
The display of speed limiter information
disappears.
176
Driving
Cruise control
System which automatically maintains the speed of the vehicle at the value programmed by the driver, without any action on the accelerator pedal.
The cruise control is switched on manually: it Steering mounted controls Displays in the instrument panel
requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph
(40 km/h).
With a manual gearbox, third or fourth gear
(depending on engine) or higher must be
engaged.
With an automatic gearbox, second gear or
higher must be engaged.
The cruise control is paused manually or

by pressing the brake or clutch pedal or
on triggering of the ESC system for safety
6
reasons.
It is possible to exceed the programmed speed 1. Select cruise control mode. 6. Cruise control pause / resume indication.
temporarily by pressing the accelerator pedal. 2. Decrease value or speed setting on the fly. 7. Cruise control mode selection indication.
To return to the programmed speed, simply 3. Increase value or speed setting on the fly. 8. Speed value setting.
release the accelerator pedal until the 4. Pause / resume cruise control.
programmed cruise speed is reached again. 5. Display the list of memorised speeds.
Switching off the ignition cancels any

programmed speed value. For more information on memorising speeds,
The cruise control system cannot, in any circumstances,
replace the need to observe speed limits, nor can it
replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
You are advised to keep your feet near the pedals at
all times.
177
Driving
Switching on Modification of the initial Pause

speed setting Once switched on, you can pause the cruise
control at any time by pressing button 4: the
screen confirms the pause.
If the cruise control is switched on, you can then

modify the initial speed in one of the following ways:
- using buttons 2 or 3:
F by successive short presses, to modify the
F Turn wheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position: the
speed by + or - 1 mph (km/h),
cruise control mode is selected but is not
F by a long press, to modify the speed in steps
switched on (Pause).
of + or - 5 mph (km/h),
F Press button 2 or 3: your vehicle's current
speed becomes the cruise speed.
The cruise control is activated (ON). - pressing button 5:
F the six memorised speeds are displayed
in the the touch screen,
F choose a value: it is displayed in the
instrument panel.
The selection screen closes after a few
moments.
The modification is then accepted.
178
Driving
Exceeding the programmed When the cruise control is switched on,

speed be careful if you maintain the pressure
on one of the programmed speed
If the programmed speed is exceeded, the
changing buttons: this may result in a
displayed speed flashes.
very rapid change in the speed of your
Once the vehicle returns to the programmed
vehicle.
speed, the display becomes steady again.
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads or in heavy traffic.
Switching off On a steep descent, the cruise control
F Turn wheel 1 to the "0" position. will not be able to prevent the vehicle
The display of information related to the from exceeding the programmed speed.
cruise control disappears. On steep climbs or when towing, the
6
programmed speed may not be reached
or maintained.
Operating fault The use of mats not approved by
PEUGEOT may interfere with the
Flashing of the dashes indicates a fault with the operation of the cruise control.
cruise control. To avoid any risk of jamming of the
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a pedals:
qualified workshop. - ensure that the mat is secured
correctly,
179
Driving
Active cruise control

This systems allows the vehicle's speed to be Principles of The active cruise control operates by
maintained at a value set by the driver.
In addition it allows (when circumstances
operation day and at night, in fog or moderate
rainfall.
permit) an inter-vehicle time that you have Using a radar with a range of about 100 metres,
selected to be maintained between your vehicle located at the front of the vehicle, this system
and the one in front. detects a vehicle running in front of your
vehicle. The selection of this system deactivates
It automatically adapts the speed of your the display of inter-vehicle time.
Switching between the vehicle to that of the vehicle in front.
types of cruise control If the vehicle in front is running more slowly,
the system progressively reduces the speed of The system does not act on the braking
The choice between the "active" and "standard"
your vehicle using just engine braking (as if the system, but works only with engine
cruise control is made in the "Driving
driver had pressed the "-" button). braking.
assistance" menu.
If your vehicle is too close to, or approaching The regulation range is limited: there will
The cruise control selection thumb wheel must
too quickly the vehicle in front, the cruise no longer be any adjustment of speed if
be in the "CRUISE" position, otherwise the
control is automatically deactivated. The the difference between the programmed
choice will not be taken into account.
driver is then alerted by an audible signal, speed setting and the speed of the
F Press the button to accompanied by a message. vehicle in front becomes too high.
change from active If the vehicle in front accelerates or changes
cruise control to lane, the active cruise control progressively
standard cruise accelerates your vehicle to return to the If the difference between the
control and vice- programmed speed. programmed speed setting and the
versa. If the driver operates a direction indicator to speed of the vehicle in front is too
overtake a slower vehicle, the active cruise great, the speed cannot be adjusted:
For more information on the
control allows your vehicle to temporarily the cruise control is automatically
"standard" cruise control, refer to the
approach the vehicle in front to assist the deactivated.
overtaking manoeuvre, though never exceeding
the programmed speed.
The state of the system is memorised on

switching off the ignition.
180
Driving
General points Steering mounted controls
The active cruise control is switched on manually, The active cruise control can be paused
it requires that the speed of the vehicle be between manually with the control, or automatically:
25 mph (40 km/h) and 90 mph (150 km/h). - by pressing the brake or clutch pedal,
- in the event of operation of the ESC, for
With a manual gearbox, third or fourth gear safety reasons,
(depending on engine) or higher must be - in the event of an action of the electric
engaged. parking brake control,
- when an inter-vehicle time threshold is
With an automatic gearbox, second gear or reached (calculated according to the
higher must be engaged. relative speeds of your vehicle and the
vehicle in front and the inter-vehicle time 1. Select cruise control mode.
6
If the cruise speed setting is above 90 mph setting chosen), 2. Reduce the cruise speed setting or set the
(150 km/h), the active cruise control switches to - when the distance between your vehicle current vehicle speed as the cruise speed
normal cruise control mode (without automatic and the one in front becomes to small, setting.
adjustment of the safety inter-vehicle distance). - when the speed of the vehicle in front is 3. Increase the cruise speed setting or set the
to low, current vehicle speed as the cruise speed
- when the speed of your vehicle becomes setting.
too low. 4. Pause / resume cruise control.
The active cruise control cannot in any 5. Display the list of memorised speeds and
circumstances replace the observation adjust the inter-vehicle time.
of speed limits, nor the need for the
vigilance on the part of the driver. The inter-vehicle time setting is For more information on memorising speeds,
It is recommended that you always keep memorised when switching off the refer to the corresponding section.
your feet close to the pedals. ignition.
181
Driving
Displays in the instrument panel Switching on Modification of the cruise

The active cruise control must be selected in control speed only
the "Driving assistance" menu. Buttons 2 (SET+) and 3 (SET-)
F Turn the wheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position:
If the cruise control is on, you can modify the
cruise control mode is selected, but not
speed:
started (Pause).
F by successive short presses, to modify by
F Press one of the buttons 2 or 3: the current
steps of + or - 1 mph (km/h),
speed of your vehicle becomes the cruise
F by a maintained press, to modify in steps
speed setting.
of + or - 5 mph (km/h).
The cruise control is activated (ON).
By default, the inter-vehicle time is set at
2 seconds. As a precaution, it is recommended that you
Otherwise, the last setting made will be used select a cruise speed setting close to the
6. Indication of cruise control pause/resume. current speed of your vehicle.
when switching on the system.
7. Indication of selection of cruise control
mode, or
vehicle speed adjustment phase.
8. Cruise speed setting.
182
Driving
Modification of the cruise control speed and/or

the inter-vehicle time
Button 5 (MEM) In the event of the presence of a
vehicle detected by the radar, if the
speed selected is much higher than
the speed of that vehicle, the system
is not activated and the alert message
"Activation not possible, conditions
unsuitable" is displayed until driving
conditions are safe to allow activation of
the system.
Press button 5, the six memorised speeds and

Exceeding the programmed
speed
6
the inter-vehicle time setting are displayed in It is possible to exceed the programmed speed
the touch screen. temporarily by depressing the accelerator
F Choose a speed setting: it is displayed in pedal.
the instrument panel, Simply release the accelerator pedal to return
F press or the "+" or "-" button to choose to the programmed speed.
a new inter-vehicle time setting between If the programmed setting is unintentionally
2.5 seconds and 1 second. exceeded, descending a steep hill for example,
This setting remains memorised, whatever the the speed setting in the instrument panel
state of the system. flashes as a warning.
The selection screen closes after a few
moments. The modifications are then accepted.
183
Driving
Driving situations and associated alerts

The following table describes the alerts and the messages displayed for the different driving situations.
The display of these alerts is not sequential.
Display in the
Symbol Associated message Comments
instrument panel
No vehicle detected:
the system operates as a standard cruise control.
Detection of a vehicle, at the limit of the range of the radar:

the system operates as a standard cruise control.
"SPEED ADJUSTED" Detection of a vehicle that is too close or running at a speed lower than your
vehicle's cruise speed setting.
The system uses engine braking to slow your vehicle (within a limit of 20 mph
(30 km/h)) and then hold it at the speed of the vehicle in front so as to observe the
programmed inter-vehicle time.
When automatically slowing down behind a vehicle, your true speed may be higher
than the "adjusted speed" displayed.
"SPEED ADJUSTED" When the adjusted speed reaches the limit of regulation (speed setting less than
20 mph (30 km/h)), the adjusted speed flashes together with the speed setting to
signal that automatic deactivation of the system is imminent.
"Cruise control If the system exceeds the limit of speed adjustment possible by the system and in
paused". the absence of any reaction by the driver (operation of the direction indicator, change
of lane, reduction of the speed of the vehicle), the system is automatically paused.
The display of the deactivation message is accompanied by an audible signal.
184
Driving
Limits of operation
When the active cruise control is The speed regulation range is limited to a
automatically paused, it can only be maximum difference of 20 mph (30 km/h)
reactivated when safe conditions are between the speed setting and the speed of the
restored. The message "Activation vehicle in front.
not possible, conditions unsuitable" Above this, the system goes into pause if the - vehicles not running in the middle of the
is displayed while reactivation is not safe distance becomes too low. lane,
possible. The active cruise control uses only engine
When the conditions allow, it is braking to slow the vehicle. Consequently the
recommended that the function be vehicle looses speed slowly, as when releasing
reactivated by pressing button 2 (SET+) the accelerator pedal.
or 3 (SET-), which will make the current The system is paused automatically:
speed of your vehicle the new cruise - if the vehicle in front slows down to much
speed setting, rather than by pressing or too suddenly, and the driver does not
button 4 (on/pause) which reactivates brake,
6
the cruise control using the old cruise - if a vehicle comes between your vehicle
speed setting, which may be very and the vehicle in front, - vehicles entering a corner,
different from the current speed of your - if the system does not slow the vehicle - vehicles changing lane at the last
vehicle. enough to continue to maintain a safe moment.
distance, for example when descending a
steep hill. The cruise control does not take account of:
As the radar's field of view is quite narrow, it is - stationary vehicles,
possible that the system may not detect: - vehicles driving in the opposite direction.
- vehicles of reduced width, such as

motorcycles, for example,
185
Driving
Operating fault When the cruise control is working, take

care if making a maintained press on
one of the cruise control programmed
In the event of a fault with the active cruise speed modification buttons: this can
control, you are alerted by an audible signal lead to a very quick change in the
and display of the message message "Driving speed of your vehicle.
aid functions fault". Do not use the active cruise control on
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT slippery surfaces or in heavy traffic.
dealer or a qualified workshop. When descending a steep hill, the
cruise control may not be able to
prevent the vehicle from exceeding the
programmed speed.
When ascending a steep hill or when
towing, it might not be possible to attain
or maintain the programmed speed.
The operation of the radar, located in
the front bumper, may be disturbed in
certain weather conditions, for example:
with accumulations of snow, ice,
mud, ... The use of mats not approved by
Clean the front bumper, removing the PEUGEOT may interfere with the
snow, mud, ... operation of the active cruise control.
To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals:
- ensure that mats are secured
correctly,
186
Driving
Display of inter-vehicle time

Using a radar located at the front of the vehicle, Activation / deactivation*
The system is active in a speed range
this system helps the driver maintain a safe
between 42 and 93 mph (70 and
distance between their vehicle and the one in Activation of the system is done in the "Driving
150 km/h).
front, by displaying the current inter-vehicle assistance" menu, with the engine running.
Stationary vehicles and certain other
time in the instrument panel.
road users (such as bicycles for F Press this button, the indicator
It is the time interval, expressed in seconds,
example) are not detected. lamp comes on.
that separates two vehicles in line. The
The system displays inter-vehicle
recommended safe value is about 2 seconds:
time values of between 3 seconds and
refer to the legislation or highway code in force The state of the system is memorised when the
0.5 of a second.
in your country. ignition is switched off.
Below 0.5 of a second, the value
displayed is maintained at this level,
even if the true inter-vehicle time is less. Conditions for display
The active cruise control must not be selected
6
(the active cruise control information is
displayed instead of that for the inter-vehicle
The measurement is displayed for time).
information only: the system takes no
action on the vehicle.
This system does not in any
circumstances replace the need for
vigilance on the part of the driver who
must remain in control of the vehicle at
all times.
The system is not designed for urban
use nor for more dynamic driving
(bends, acceleration, harsh braking…)
but rather when driving at a steady
speed.
* Depending on version.
187
Driving
Displays
Once the speed conditions are met, a symbol is displayed in the instrument panel.
Symbol Associated message Comments
No vehicle detected by the radar.
A vehicle is detected but the inter-vehicle time is more than 3 seconds. No value is
displayed.
A vehicle is detected. The inter-vehicle time is 3 seconds or less. The minimum value
displayed is 0.5 seconds, even if the true inter-vehicle time is lower.
"SYSTEM INACTIVE: Speed If the speed of your vehicle is outside the operating range.
unsuitable" Where the speed is not suitable, a message is displayed while the speed is outside limits
(below 42 mph (70 km/h) or above 93 mph (150 km/h), approximately). However, when
decelerating, the system is deactivated below 27 mph (45 km/h).
"SYSTEM INACTIVE: Visibility The system switches to standby automatically if the sensor does not detect the vehicle in
reduced" front correctly (very difficult weather conditions, sensor out of adjustment, ...).
188
Driving
Operating limits
The vehicle being followed may not be detected
in certain conditions such as, for example:
- when turning,
- when changing lane,
- when the vehicle in front is out of the range
of the sensor (maximum range: around
100 m).
Operating fault The operation of the radar, located in

6
In the event of a fault with the system, certain weather conditions, for example:
this warning lamp is displayed with accumulations of snow, ice,
accompanied by a message. mud, ...
Clean the front bumper, removing the
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
snow, mud, ...
At the first use of the system after

repair, a message may be displayed
indicating that the system is initialising.
The system is not available while this is
in progress. As soon as the message
disappears the system is operational
again. If the message does not
disappear, contact a PEUGEOT dealer
189
Driving
Emergency collision alert system and emergency collision braking system

Emergency collision alert
System providing a warning to the driver that
This system operates from 20 mph
their vehicle is at risk of collision with the
(30 km/h), only when other vehicles are
vehicle in front.
running in the same direction as your
vehicle; the system does not detect
stationary objects. A radar is fitted at
the front of the vehicle.
This system has been designed to

improve driving safety.
The driver must constantly monitor
the traffic conditions, to assess the
distance and relative speed of other
vehicles.
The collision risk alert system does not
replace the need for vigilance on the
part of of the driver.
The emergency collision alert system can be

activated or deactivated by the driver.
From the secondary page of the "Driving
assistance" menu:
F Select the "Vehicle settings" menu.
F Check the "Collision risk alert and auto
braking" line and confirm.
190
Driving
Setting the thresholds for

the alert
The alert thresholds determine how you want to
be alerted to the presence of a vehicle running
in front of you.
You can choose from three thresholds:
- 1: "Distant", to be given an early alert
(cautious driving).
- 2: "Normal".
- 3: "Close", to be given a later alert (sporty
driving).
6
From the secondary page of the "Driving F Modify the alert threshold and press on
assistance" menu: "Finish" to memorise the threshold and
F Select the "Vehicle settings" menu. leave the menu.
F Check the "Collision risk alert and auto F Press on "Confirm" to save the change.
braking" line.
F Press on the magnifying glass.
191
Driving
Alerts
According to the collision risk detected by

The emergency collision alert system If the speed of your vehicle is too high
the system and the alert threshold chosen,
does not replace the need for vigilance when approaching another vehicle, the
different levels of alert can be given.
on the part of the driver. first level of alert may not be displayed:
Level 1: visual alert only (orange) the level 2 alert may be displayed
indicating that the vehicle in front is directly.
The change from one level of alert On the other hand, the level 1 alert
very close. The message "Vehicle
to the next takes place if the driving is never displayed with the "close"
close" is displayed.
conditions do not change (speed triggering threshold 3.
unchanged, no change of lane...). Severe weather conditions (very heavy
This level of alert is based on the inter-vehicle rain, accumulations of snow in front
time between your vehicle and the one in front. of the radar) may interfere with the
operation of the system, resulting in
the display of this message "SYSTEM
Level 2: visual (red) and audible INACTIVE: Reduced visibility". The
alerts indicating that a collision is system will remain unavailable until the
imminent. The message "Brake!" message disappears.
is displayed.
This level of alert is based on a time before

collision. It takes account of the vehicle
dynamics, the speed of your vehicle and
the speed of the vehicle in front, the driving
conditions, the situation with your vehicle
(cornering, pedals pressed, etc.) to trigger the
alert at the right moment.
192
Driving
Emergency automatic
braking system
Emergency automatic braking is a system that
aims to reduce the speed of a frontal collision
if the driver does not take action, using radar
type detection and acting on the vehicle's
braking system.
From the secondary page of the "Driving F Modify the alert threshold and check the
6
assistance" menu: "Auto braking" line.
F Select the "Vehicle settings" menu. F Press on "Finish" to memorise the
F Check the "Collision risk alert and auto threshold and leave the menu.
braking" line. F Press on "Confirm" to save the change.
Conditions for activation This warning lamp flashes when your

F Press the magnifying glass. vehicle "starts" to brake but will not
Emergency automatic braking only operates in
the following conditions: in any circumstance completely stop
● engine running the vehicle.
● no fault in the electronic stability system, You should continue to press firmly
● speed at least 12 mph (20 km/h), on the brake pedal until the vehicle
● engine speed sufficiently high. comes to a complete stop.
On the other hand, the radar type of detection
When the emergency collision
cannot act on the braking system in a tight
braking system is not activated,
corner.
this warning lamp is on fixed.
193
Driving
Operating fault
In the event of a fault, you are

alerted by the display of the Service
warning lamp, accompanied by
a message.
Consult a PEUGEOT dealer or
The operation of the radar, located in

certain weather conditions, for example:
with accumulations of snow, ice,
mud, ...
Clean the front bumper, removing the
snow, mud, ...
194
Driving
Blind spot sensors

Operation
Activation of the system is done in
the "Driving assistance" menu of
the touch screen.
F Press this button (depending on
version) to activate the function; the
associated indicator lamp comes on.
This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument

panel.
Sensors fitted in the front and rear bumpers
This driving assistance system warns the driver A warning lamp appears in the door mirror on monitor the blind spots.
of the presence of another vehicle in the blind the side in question:
6
spot angle of their vehicle (areas masked from - immediately, when being overtaken,
the driver's field of vision), as soon as this - after a delay of about one second, when
presents a potential danger. overtaking a vehicle slowly.
This system is designed to improve safety when driving and is in no circumstances a

substitute for the use of the interior rear view mirror and door mirrors. It is the driver's
responsibility to constantly check the traffic, to asses the distances and relative speeds of
other vehicles and to predict their movements before deciding whether to change lane.
The blind spot sensor system does not replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
195
Driving
The alert is given by a warning lamp which

comes on in the door mirror on the side in
question as soon as a vehicle - car, lorry,
bicycle - is detected and the following
conditions are fulfilled:
- all the vehicles must be moving in the
same direction and on adjacent lanes,
- the speed of your vehicle is between 7 and
87 mph (12 and 140 km/h),
- when you overtake a vehicle with a speed
difference of less than 6 mph (10 km/h),
- when a vehicle overtakes you with a speed
difference of less than 15 mph (25 km/h),
- the traffic must be flowing normally,
- in the case of an overtaking manoeuvre,
if this is prolonged and the vehicle being No alert will be given in the following situations: - when overtaking (or being overtaken by) a
overtaken remains in the blind spot, - in the presence of immobile objects very long vehicle (lorry, coach...) which is
- you are driving on a straight or slightly (parked vehicles, barriers, street lamps, at the same time detected at the rear in the
curved road, road signs...), blind spot angle and present in the driver's
- your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, a - with vehicles moving in the opposite forward field of vision,
caravan... direction, - in very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in
- driving on a sinuous road or a sharp front and behind are confused with a lorry
corner, or an immobile object,
- when overtaking quickly.
196
Driving
Operating fault The system may suffer temporary

interference in certain weather
F To deactivate the system, press Depending on version: conditions (rain, hail...).
this button again; its indicator lamp In particular, driving on a wet surface
- this warning lamp
goes off as well as the associated or moving from a dry area to a wet area
flashes for a few
indicator in the instrument panel can cause false alerts (for example, the
seconds then goes off,
(depending on version). presence of a fog of water droplets in
- this symbol changes to alert the blind spot angle is interpreted as a
The state of the system remains in memory on
mode, its warning lamp flashes vehicle).
switching off the ignition.
for a few moments, then goes off. In bad or wintry weather, ensure that
the sensors are not covered by mud,
The system is automatically deactivated
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a ice or snow.
when towing with a towbar approved by
qualified workshop. Take care not to cover the warning zone
PEUGEOT.
6
in the door mirrors or the detection
zones on the front and rear bumpers
with adhesive labels or other objects;
they may hamper the correct operation
of the system.
High pressure jet wash

When washing your vehicle, direct the
lance at least 30 cm away from the
sensors.
197
Driving
Parking sensors
Rear parking sensors
The system is switched on by engaging reverse
gear. This is accompanied by an audible signal.
The system is switched off when you come out
of reverse gear.
Visual assistance
This supplements the audible signal by displaying
bars in the screen or the instrument panel which
This system indicates the proximity of an move progressively nearer to the vehicle. When the
obstacle (person, vehicle, tree, gate, etc.) obstacle is near, the "Danger" symbol is displayed.
which comes within the field of detection of
sensors located in the bumper. Front parking sensors
Certain types of obstacle (stake, roadworks
cone, etc.) detected initially will no longer be As an addition to the rear parking sensors, the
detected at the end of the manoeuvre due to front parking sensors are triggered when an
the presence of blind spots. obstacle is detected in front and the speed of
Audible assistance the vehicle is still below 6 mph (10 km/h).
The proximity information is given by an The front parking sensors are interrupted if
intermittent audible signal, the frequency of the vehicle stops for more than three seconds
This function cannot, in any
which increases as the vehicle approaches the in forward gear, if no further obstacles are
circumstances, take the place of
obstacle. detected or when the speed of the vehicle
the vigilance of the driver.
The sound emitted by the speaker (right or left) exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).
indicates the side on which the obstacle is located.
When the distance between the vehicle and
the obstacle becomes less than approximately The sound from the speakers (front or
thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes rear) indicates whether the obstacle is
continuous. in front or behind.
198
Driving
Deactivation / Activation of Operating fault

the front and rear parking
sensors Depending on version and when engaging
In bad weather or in winter, ensure
reverse:
The system is deactivated in the that the sensors are not covered with
"Driving assistance" menu of the - this warning lamp comes on in mud, ice or snow. When reverse gear is
touch screen. the instrument panel and/or a engaged, an audible signal (long beep)
message appears, accompanied indicates that the sensors may be dirty.
by an audible signal, Certain sound sources (motorcycle,
F Press this button. The indicator
lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may trigger
lamp in the button comes on. - this symbol changes to alert mode,
the audible signals of the parking
its warning lamp flashes for a few
sensor system.
moments then stays on and a
Pressing this button again reactivates the function. message appears, accompanied by
6
The indicator lamp in the button goes off. an audible signal.

The system will be deactivated
workshop.
automatically if a trailer is being High pressure jet wash
towed or a bicycle carrier is fitted on When washing your vehicle, do not
a towbar (vehicle fitted with a towbar direct the lance within 30 cm of the
installed in line with the manufacturer's sensors.
recommendations).
The parking sensors are deactivated

while the Park Assist system is
measuring a space.
For more information on Park Assist,
199
Driving
Reversing camera
The blue lines represent the general direction
of the vehicle (the difference corresponds to
the width of your vehicle without the mirrors).
The red lines represent a distance of about
30 cm beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear
bumper.
The green lines represent distances of about
1 and 2 metres beyond the edge of your
vehicle's rear bumper.
The turquoise blue curves represent the
maximum turning circle.
The reversing camera is activated automatically

High pressure jet washing
when reverse gear is engaged.
When washing your vehicle, do not Opening the tailgate causes the display
Depending on version, the image is displayed
direct the lance within 30 cm of the to disappear.
in the touch screen or the instrument panel.
camera lens.
The reversing camera function may be
Clean the reversing camera regularly using a
completed with parking sensors.
The superimposed representation of guide soft, dry cloth.
lines helps with the manoeuvre.
The reversing camera cannot in any They are represented by lines marked "on
circumstances be a substitute for the ground" and do not allow the position of
vigilance on the part of the driver. the vehicle to be determined relative to tall
obstacles (for example: other vehicles, ...).
Some deformation of the image is normal.
200
Driving
Park Assist
This system provides active assistance with The Park Assist system provides
During a manoeuvre the steering wheel
parking, detecting a parking space then assistance for the following
turns quickly: do not hold the steering
controlling the steering to park in the space. manoeuvres:
wheel, do not place your hand between
It controls the steering while the driver
the spokes of the steering wheel and
manages the accelerator, brakes, gears and
take care with loose and bulky clothing,
clutch (manual gearbox). During phases of
scarves, handbags... There is a risk of
entry into and exit from a parking space, the
injury.
system provides visual and audible information
to the driver in order to make the manoeuvres
safe. It may be necessary to move forwards
and backwards more than once. - entry into a parallel parking space
When Park Assist is activated, it

prevents a change to STOP mode of
6
The driver can take control at any time by Stop & Start. In STOP mode, activation
gripping the steering wheel. of Park Assist restarts the engine.
The Park Assist system cannot in any

circumstances replace the need for
vigilance on the part of the driver.
- exit from a parallel parking space
The driver must remain in control
of their vehicle ensuring that the
The Park Assist system takes control
space remains clear throughout the
of the power steering for a maximum
manoeuvre.
of 4 manoeuvre cycles. The function
In some circumstances, the sensors
is deactivated after these 4 cycles.
may not detect small obstacles located
If you think that your vehicle is not
in their blind spots.
positioned correctly, you should then
take control of the steering to carry out
The Park Assist system cannot work the manoeuvre.
with the engine off. - bay parking
201
Driving
The sequence of manoeuvres and the You should always check the The park sensors function is not
driving instructions are displayed in the surroundings of your vehicle before available during parking space
instrument panel. starting a manoeuvre. measurement. It intervenes later when
The assistance is manoeuvring to warn you that your
activated: the display of this vehicle is approaching an obstacle: the
symbol and a speed limit audible signal becomes continuous
indicate that the steering when the obstacle is less than thirty
manoeuvres are controlled centimetres away.
by the system: do not touch If you have deactivated the parking
the steering wheel. sensors, they are automatically
reactivated during assisted parking
manoeuvres.
The assistance is
deactivated: the display of
this symbol indicates that
the steering manoeuvres
Activation of Park Assist inhibits the
are no longer controlled by
blind spot monitoring function.
the system: you must take
control of the steering.
202
Driving
Operation
F Limit the speed of the vehicle to F Operate the direction indicator on the
Assistance with parallel parking parking side chosen to activate the
manoeuvres a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h)
6
and select "Enter parking slot" measurement function. You should drive
F When you have identified a parking at a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m
in the touch screen.
space. from the row of parked vehicles.
F Press this control.

To enter a parking space, the system
does not identify spaces that are clearly
smaller or larger than the vehicle.
or
F Select "Park Assist" in the

"Driving assistance" menu of
the touch screen to activate the
function.
F Drive slowly following the instructions until

the system finds a free space.
203
Driving
F Move forwards slowly until a message is F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in F At the end of the manoeuvre, the operating
displayed, accompanied by an audible progress. indicator lamp goes out in the instrument
signal, asking you to engage reverse gear. Without exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h), move panel, accompanied by a message and an
forwards and backwards, aided by the audible signal.
warnings from the "Parking sensors" The assistance is deactivated: you can
system, until the indication of the end of the take over control.
manoeuvre.
F Select reverse, release the steering wheel

and start moving without exceeding 5 mph
(8 km/h).
204
Driving
Assistance in exiting from F Operate the direction indicator for the exit The manoeuvre is complete when the vehicle's
a parallel parking space side chosen. front wheels are clear of the parking space.
F Engage reverse or forward gear and At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp
F When you want to leave a parallel parking
release the steering wheel. in the instrument panel goes off, accompanied
space, start the engine.
by a message and an audible signal.
6
The assistance is deactivated: you can take
F With the vehicle stationary, press over control.
this control.
or
"Driving assistance" menu of
the touch screen to activate the
function. F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in
progress. Without exceeding 3 mph
F Press on "Exit parking slot" in (5 km/h), move forwards and backwards,
the touch screen. aided by the warnings from the "Parking
sensors" system, until the indication of the
end of the manoeuvre.
205
Driving
When several successive bays are

found, the vehicle will be directed
towards the last one.
Assistance with bay parking F Operate the direction indicator on the

manoeuvres parking side chosen to activate the
measurement function. You should drive
F Once you have identified a
at a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m
parking zone, press this control
from the row of parked vehicles.
at the steering wheel,
or

"Driving assistance" menu of F Move forwards slowly until a message is
the touch screen to activate the displayed, accompanied by an audible
function. signal, asking you to engage reverse gear.
F Limit the speed of the vehicle to
a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h)
and select "Start parking in a
bay" on the touch screen.
F Drive slowly following the instructions until
the system finds a free space.
206
Driving
During a bay parking manoeuvre, the

Park Assist system is automatically
deactivated once the rear of the vehicle
is within 50 cm of an obstacle.
During parking and exit from

F Select reverse, release the steering wheel At the end of the manoeuvre, the operating
parking manoeuvres, the reversing
and start moving without exceeding 5 mph indicator lamp goes off in the instrument panel,
camera function may come into
(8 km/h). accompanied by a message and an audible
operation. It facilitates monitoring
signal.
of the surroundings of the vehicle,
The assistance is deactivated: you can take
6
by displaying additional information
over control.
in the instrument panel (see the
corresponding section).
F The assisted parking manoeuvre is in

progress.
Without exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h), follow
the instructions displayed in the instrument
panel, aided by the warnings from the
"Parking sensors" system, until the
indication of the end of the manoeuvre.
207
Driving
Deactivation Switching off

The system is deactivated by pressing the The system is switched off automatically: In the event of a fault, the symbol
control. - when towing a trailer, for the button changes to alert
The system is deactivated automatically: - if the driver's door is opened, mode and the warning lamp flashes
- on switching off the ignition, - if the speed of the vehicle is above 42 mph for a few moments then goes off.
- if the engine stalls, (70 km/h). Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
- if no manoeuvre is started within 5 minutes To switch the system of for a prolonged period, workshop.
of selection of the type of manoeuvre, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
- after a prolonged stop of the vehicle during workshop.
a manoeuvre,
- if the road wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR)
is triggered, Operating faults
- if the speed of the vehicle exceeds the
If the lateral distance between your vehicle
stated limit, Depending on version: and the space is too great, the system may
- when the driver interrupts movement of the
- this warning lamp comes on not be able to measure the space.
steering wheel,
in the instrument panel and a Anything projecting beyond the envelope
- after 4 manoeuvre cycles,
message appears, accompanied of the vehicle (long or wide load) is not
- on opening the driver's door,
by an audible signal, taken into account by the Park Assist
- if one of the front wheels encounters an
system during a manoeuvre.
obstacle.
The operation indicator lamp goes off in the - this symbol changes to alert
instrument panel and a message is displayed mode, its warning lamp flashes
accompanied by an audible signal. for a few moments, then goes off. In bad weather or in winter, ensure that
The driver should then take back control of the the sensors are not covered by road
vehicle's steering. dirt, ice or snow.
In the event of a fault, have the system
If the system is deactivated during a checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
manoeuvre, the drive should reactivate it to qualified workshop.
repeat the measurement.
208
Driving
Under-inflation detection
System which automatically checks the pressures of the tyres while driving.
The system monitors the pressures in the
The under-inflation detection system The inflation pressures defined for
four tyres, once the vehicle is moving.
does not replace the need for vigilance your vehicle can be found on the tyre
It compares the information given by the four
on the part of the driver. pressure label.
wheel speed sensors with reference values,
This system does not avoid the need to For more information on the
which must be reinitialised every time the
check the tyre pressures (including the identification markings, refer to the
tyre pressures are adjusted or a wheel
spare wheel) every month as well as corresponding section.
changed.
before a long journey. Tyre pressures should be checked
The system triggers an alert as soon as it
Driving with under-inflated tyres impairs when the tyres are "cold" (vehicle
detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one
road holding, extends braking distances stopped for 1 hour or after a journey of
or more tyres.
and causes premature tyre wear, less than 6 miles (10 km) at moderate
particularly under arduous condition speeds).
(high loading, high speed, long journey). Otherwise (when hot), add 0.3 bar to
6
the pressures shown on the label.
Driving with under-inflated tyres Snow chains

increases fuel consumption.
The system does not have to be
reinitialised after fitting or removing
snow chains.
209
Driving
Under-inflation alert Reinitialisation
This is given by fixed illumination of F In the event of a puncture, use the

this warning lamp, accompanied by temporary puncture repair kit or the spare
an audible signal and, depending on wheel (depending on equipment),
equipment, the display of a message. or
F if you have a compressor, such as the one It is necessary to reinitialise the system every
F Reduce speed immediately, avoid in the temporary puncture repair kit, check time one or more tyre pressures are adjusted,
excessive steering movements and sudden the pressures of the four tyres when cold, and after changing one or more wheels.
braking or A label attached to the middle pillar, driver's
F Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to F if it is not possible to make this check side, gives a reminder of this.
do so. immediately, drive carefully at reduced
speed.
The loss of pressure detected does not Before reinitialising the system, ensure
always cause visible bulging of the tyre. that the pressures of the four tyres are
Do not satisfy yourself with just a visual The alert is maintained until the system correct for the use of the vehicle and in
check. is reinitialised. line with the recommendations on the
tyre pressure label.
The under-inflation alert can only be
relied on if the reinitialisation of the
system has done with the pressures in
the four tyres correctly adjusted.
The under-inflation detection system
does not give a warning if a pressure is
incorrect at the time of reinitialisation.
210
Driving
Touch screen Screen C
F Press the "5" or "6" button to select the

Define the vehicle parameters menu,
then confirm by pressing the OK button.
F Press the "5" or "6" button to select the

Reinitialisation of the system is done with the Driving assistance menu, then the Tyre
6
ignition on and the vehicle stationary. pressures menu, then the Reinitialisation
menu, then confirming by pressing the OK
From the "Driving assistance" menu button.
of the touch screen: An audible signal confirms the
reinitialisation.
F Press "Under-inflation
initialisation".
F Confirm the instruction by pressing "Yes",

an audible signal and a message confirm F Press the MENU button for access to the
the reinitialisation. main menu.
F Press the "7" or "8" buttons to select the
Personalisation-configuration menu,
The new pressure settings registered
then confirm by pressing the OK button.
are considered to be reference values
by the system.
211
Driving
Screen A Operating fault

Screen A (without audio system)
The flashing and then fixed illumination of the

under-inflation warning lamp accompanied
by illumination of the Service warning lamp
indicates a fault with the system.
In this case, under-inflation monitoring of the

tyres is no longer assured.
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
F With the ignition on and the dealer or a qualified workshop.
vehicle stationary, press this
button for about 3 seconds then Before doing anything to the system,
release it, an audible signal the pressures of the four tyres must be
confirms the reinitialisation. checked and the system reinitialised.
212
Practical information
Fuel tank
Capacity of the tank: approximately 53 litres (or 45 litres according to version).
Opening Refuelling
- If your vehicle has Keyless Entry and Additions of fuel must be of at least 10 litres to F Remove the filler cap and hang it on its
Starting, unlock the vehicle. be registered by the fuel gauge. carrier (on the filler flap).
- Press the filler flap (on the rear side of the Opening the filler cap may result in an inrush of F Introduce the nozzle and push it in fully
7
vehicle) then pull it. air. This vacuum is entirely normal and results (pushing on the the metal non-return
from the sealing of the fuel system. valve A).
F Fill the tank. Do not continue past the third
cut-off of the nozzle, as this may cause
malfunctions.
F Take care to select the pump that delivers F Refit the filler cap turning it to the right.
With Stop & Start, never refuel with the F Push the filler flap to close it (your vehicle
the correct fuel type for your vehicle's
system in STOP mode; you must switch must be unlocked).
engine (reminder on a label on the inside of
off the ignition with the key, or the
the filler flap).
START/STOP button if your vehicle has
F Introduce the key into the filler cap, if your
Keyless Entry and Starting.
vehicle has a normal key.
F Turn the filler cap to the left.
213
Diesel misfuel prevention

Your vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter, Mechanical device which prevents filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids the risk of
a device which helps to reduce the level of engine damage that can result from filling with the wrong fuel.
harmful emissions in the exhaust gases. Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention device appears when the filler cap is removed.
For petrol engines, you must use unleaded
fuel only.
The filler neck is narrower, admitting petrol It is still possible to use a fuel can to fill
nozzles only. the tank but this must be done slowly.
In order to ensure a good flow of fuel,
do not place the nozzle of the fuel can
If you have put in the wrong fuel for
in direct contact with the flap of the
your vehicle, you must have have
misfuel prevention device.
the tank drained and refilled with
the correct fuel before you start the
engine.
Low fuel level

When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the Travelling abroad
When the low fuel level in the tank is
fuel filler neck of your Diesel vehicle, it comes
reached, this warning lamp comes on As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be different
into contact with the flap. The system remains
in the instrument panel, accompanied in other countries, the presence of the misfuel
closed and prevents filling.
by an audible warning and a message. prevention device may make refuelling
When it first comes on, less than 10 litres of Do not persist but introduce a Diesel filler
impossible.
fuel remain in the tank. nozzle.
Before travelling abroad, we recommend that
You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid you check with the PEUGEOT dealer network,
running out. whether your vehicle is suitable for the fuel
pumps in the country in which you want
Fuel supply cut-off to travel.
Your vehicle is equipped with a safety device
which cuts off the fuel supply in the event of a
collision.
214
Fuel used for petrol Fuel used for Diesel

engines engines
The petrol engines are compatible with The Diesel engines are compatible with
E10 bio-petrol (containing 10 % ethanol), biofuels which conform to current and future
conforming to European standards EN 228 and European standards (Diesel fuel which
EN 15376. complies with standard EN 590 mixed with a
E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 % ethanol) biofuel which complies with standard
are reserved exclusively for vehicles marketed EN 14214) available at the pumps (containing
for the use of this type of fuel (BioFlex up to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
vehicles). The quality of the ethanol must B30 biofuel can be used in certain Diesel
comply with European standard EN 15293. engines. However, this use, even occasional,
requires strict application of the special
servicing conditions. Contact a PEUGEOT
The use of any other type of (bio)fuel
(vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted,
domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of
7
damage to the engine and fuel system).
215
Snow chains
In wintry conditions, snow chains improve traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle
when braking.
Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the Advice on installation

The snow chains must be fitted only
type of wheel fitted to your vehicle:
to the front wheels. They must never F If you have to fit the chains during a
be fitted to "space-saver" type spare journey, stop the vehicle on a flat surface
wheels. on the side of the road.
F Apply the parking brake and position any
Original tyre size Type of chain.
wheel chocks to prevent movement of
your vehicle.
195/65 R15 F Fit the chains following the instructions
Take account of the legislation in force provided by the manufacturer.
in your country on the use of snow 205/55 R16 9 mm links F Move off gently and drive for a few
chains and the maximum running speed moments, without exceeding 30 mph
225/45 R17
authorised. (50 km/h).
225/40 R18 K-Summit K23 F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow
chains are correctly tightened.
Michelin Easygrip
235/35 R19
L12*
It is strongly recommended that before
you leave, you practise fitting the snow Avoid driving with snow chains on roads
chains on a level and dry surface. You can also use snow socks. that have been cleared of snow, to
For more information on snow chains, contact a avoid damaging your vehicle's tyres and
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. the road surface. If your vehicle is fitted
with alloy wheels, check that no part of
the chain or its fixings is in contact with
the wheel rim.
* Except Italy and Austria.

216
Very cold climate screen

Removable screen which prevents the accumulation of snow at the radiator cooling fan.
Before fitting or removing the screen, Removal

ensure that the engine is off and the cooling
F Use a screwdriver as a lever to unclip each
fan has stopped. It is recommended that
retaining clip in turn.
the screen be fitted and removed by a
Do not forget to remove the very cold

climate screen:
- when the ambient temperature exceeds
10° C (for example: in summer, ...),
- when towing,
- at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
7
Fitting
F Offer up the screen to the front of the top
section of the front bumper upper grille.
F Press on the screen to engage its fixing
clips.
217
Towing a trailer
Blanking cover
We recommend the use of genuine
PEUGEOT towbars and their harnesses
that have been tested and approved
from the design stage of your vehicle,
and that the fitting of the towbar is
entrusted to a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If the towbar is not fitted by a
PEUGEOT dealer, it must still be
fitted in accordance with the vehicle
Your vehicle is primarily designed for
manufacturer's instructions.
transporting people and luggage, but it may
also be used for towing a trailer. When towing, you must remove the blanking
cover if your vehicle has one. Driving with a trailer places greater
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified demands on the towing vehicle and the
workshop for this. driver must take particular care.
For more advice on driving when

GTi towbar The cover is located behind the lower
towing, refer to the corresponding
air intake grille.
section.
Your vehicle cannot be fitted with a
towbar.
For more information on weights (and

the towed loads which apply to your
vehicle) refer to the corresponding
section.
218
Energy economy mode Load reduction mode

System which manages the duration of use of certain functions to conserve a sufficient level of System which manages the use of certain
charge in the battery. functions according to the level of charge
After the engine has stopped, you can still use functions such as the audio and telematics remaining in the battery.
system, windscreen wipers, dipped beam headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for a maximum When the vehicle is being driven, the load
combined duration of about forty minutes. reduction function temporarily deactivates
certain functions, such as the air conditioning,
Switching to economy Exiting economy mode the heated rear screen...
The deactivated functions are reactivated
mode These functions are reactivated automatically
automatically as soon as conditions permit.
A message then appears in the instrument next time the vehicle is driven.
panel screen indicating that the vehicle has In order to restore the use of these functions
switched to economy mode and the active immediately, start the engine and let it run:
functions are put on standby. - for less than ten minutes, to use the
If a telephone call is being made at this time, it equipment for approximately five minutes,
will be maintained for around 10 minutes with - for more than ten minutes, to use the
the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio equipment for up to approximately
system. thirty minutes.
Let the engine run for the duration specified to
7
ensure that the battery charge is sufficient.
Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the
engine in order to charge the battery.
A flat battery prevents the engine from starting.
For more information on the battery, refer to the
219
Accessories
A wide range of accessories and genuine parts is available from the PEUGEOT dealer network.
These accessories and parts are all suitable for your vehicle and benefit from PEUGEOT's recommendation and warranty.
Conversion kits "Styling" "Multimedia"

You can obtain an "Enterprise" kit to convert a alloy wheels from 15 inch to 18 inch, finishers Multimedia support, hands-free kit, DVD player,
trade vehicle to a private car and vice-versa. for wheels, door sills, gear lever knobs, ... driving aids, vehicle tracking system, ...
"Ligne S": 16 and 17 inch alloy wheels, body
kit, stickers, interior and exterior mirror shells,
gear lever knob, door sills, mats*, …
"Comfort"
Door deflectors, side blinds and rear blind,
cigarette lighter, boot dividers, coat hanger
fixed to head restraint, front centre armrest, "Security and safety"
under shelf storage, front and rear parking
Anti-theft alarm, window engraving, wheel
sensors, styling mudflaps, window film, boot
security bolts, child seats and booster
management system, ...
cushions, breathalyzer, first aid kit, warning
triangle, high visibility jacket, stolen vehicle
tracking system, temporary puncture repair kit,
snow chains, non-slip covers, front foglamps
"Transport solutions" kit, dog guard, ...
Boot liners, roof bars, bicycle carrier on roof
bars, ski carrier, roof box, towbar harness, ...
Tow bar, which mst be fitted by PEUGEOT "Protection"
dealer or a qualified workshop. Mats*, seat covers compatible with lateral
airbags, mud flaps, side protection rubbing
strips, bumper protection rubbing strips,
* To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
bumper protectors, boot sill finishers, boot
- ensure that the mat is positioned and
mat, ...
secured correctly,
220
Installation of radio Depending on the legislation in force in

communication the country, certain safety equipment
transmitters may be compulsory: high visibility
safety vests, warning triangles,
Before installing any after-market radio
breathalyzers, spare bulbs, spare fuses,
communication transmitter, you can
fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud flaps
contact a PEUGEOT dealer for the
at the rear of the vehicle.
specification of transmitters which can
be fitted (frequency, maximum power,
aerial position, specific installation
requirements), in line with the Vehicle
Electromagnetic Compatibility The fitting of electrical equipment
Directive (2004/104/EC). or accessories which are not
recommended by PEUGEOT may result
in a failure of your vehicle's electronic
system and excessive electrical
consumption.
7
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer
By visiting a PEUGEOT dealer, you can also for information on the range of
obtain products for cleaning and maintenance recommended equipment and
(exterior and interior) - including ecological accessories.
products in the "TECHNATURE" range, topping
up products (screenwash...), touch-up pens
and paint aerosols for the exact colour of your
vehicle, refills (cartridge for the temporary
puncture repair kit...), ...
221
Changing a wiper blade

Fitting
F Put the corresponding new wiper blade in
place and clip it.
F Fold down the wiper arm carefully.
After fitting a front wiper

blade
F Switch on the ignition.
F Operate the wiper stalk again to park the
Before removing a front wiper blades.
wiper blade
F Within one minute after switching off
the ignition, operate the wiper stalk to
position the wiper blades vertically on
the windscreen.
Removing
F Raise the corresponding wiper arm.
F Unclip the wiper blade and remove it.
222
Fitting roof bars

When fitting transverse roof bars, take care to With longitudinal bars
Do not exceed the maximum authorised
position them correctly on the retaining pins
load, shown in the instructions for the
located in the door apertures.
roof bars.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the

speed of the vehicle to the profile of the
road to avoid damaging the roof bars
and the fixings on the roof.
Be sure to refer to national legislation in
order to comply with the regulations for
transporting objects which are longer
than the vehicle.
You must fit the transverse bars to the

longitudinal bars at the fixing points indicated
Recommendations by engraved markings on the longitudinal bars.
- For safety reasons and to avoid damaging
7
the roof, it is essential to use the transverse
bars listed for your vehicle.
- Distribute the load evenly, avoiding
overloading on one side.
- Arrange the heaviest part of the load as
Use accessories recommended by close as possible to the roof.
PEUGEOT observing the manufacturer's - Anchor the load securely and fit a warning
recommendations and fitting instructions flag if part of it overhangs the vehicle.
so as to avoid the risk of damaging the - Drive gently, as the vehicle will be more
body (deformation, scratches, ...). susceptible to the effects of side winds
(vehicle stability may be affected).
- Remove the roof bars as soon as they are
no longer needed.
223
Bicycle / accessory
carrier
Do not fit an accessory carrier to the

tailgate.
224
PEUGEOT & TOTAL,

A partnership to deliver
better performance!
Innovation, the key to success
The TOTAL Research and Development and
PEUGEOT teams work together to develop high
quality lubricants that meet the requirements
of PEUGEOT vehicles. For you, this is the
assurance that the performance of your engine
is optimised while also ensuring its durability.
The 208 HYbrid FE demonstrates the ability of
PEUGEOT and TOTAL to develop innovative
technologies and provide other ways of moving
towards the future.
Reduced exhaust emissions,

a true reality
TOTAL lubricants are formulated to optimise the
7
efficiency of engines and the protection of the
emissions post-treatment systems. It is important
to observe the servicing recommendations
made by PEUGEOT to assure correct operation.
208 HYbrid FE, a technology demonstrator with exceptional characteristics:
1.9 l/100 km (148.7 mpg) and 0 to 100 km/h (0 to 62 mph) in 8 seconds.
RECOMMENDS
225
Bonnet
Before doing anything under the
bonnet, switch off the Stop & Start
system to avoid any risk of injury
resulting from an automatic change to
START mode.
F Pull the safety catch towards you, then F Unclip the stay from its housing and place
raise the bonnet. it in the support slot to hold the bonnet
open.
Do not open the bonnet under very Closing

windy conditions. F Take the stay out of its support slot.
When the engine is hot, handle the F Clip the stay back into its housing.
Opening exterior safety catch and the stay with F Lower the bonnet and release it at the end
F Open the door. care (risk of burns). of its travel.
F Pull the release lever, located at the bottom To avoid damaging electrical units, F Pull on the bonnet to check that it has
of the door aperture, towards you. it is strictly forbidden to use a high latched correctly.
pressure jet wash under the bonnet.
226
Petrol engine
1. Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.
2. Coolant header tank.
3. Brake fluid filler cap.
4. Battery / Fuses.
5. Fusebox.
6. Air filter.
7. Engine oil dipstick.
8. Engine oil filler cap.
This engine is shown as an example. The locations of the engine oil dipstick and filler cap may vary.
227
Diesel engine
1. Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.
2. Coolant header tank.
3. Brake fluid filler cap.
4. Battery / Fuses.
5. Fusebox.
6. Air filter.
7. Engine oil dipstick.
8. Engine oil filler cap.
9. Priming pump*.
This engine is shown as an example. The locations of the engine oil dipstick and filler cap may vary.
* According to engine.
228
Checking levels
Check all of these levels regularly, in line with the manufacturer's service schedule. Top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.
If a level drops significantly, have the corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Take care when working under the bonnet, as certain areas of the engine may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the cooling fan could start at
any time (even with the ignition off).
Engine oil level

The check is carried out either when Checking using the dipstick
the ignition is switched on using the
F Locate the dipstick in the engine
oil level indicator in the instrument
compartment of your vehicle.
panel for vehicles so equipped, or
For more information on the petrol or Diesel A = MAX
using the dipstick.
engine, refer to the corresponding section.
F Take the dipstick by its coloured grip and
To ensure that the reading is correct, your remove it completely.
vehicle must be parked on a level surface F Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean
7
with the engine having been off for more than B = MIN
non-fluffy cloth.
30 minutes. F Refit the dipstick and push fully down, then
It is normal to top up the oil level between pull it out again to make the visual check:
two services (or oil changes). PEUGEOT the correct level is between the marks A If you find that the level is above the A mark or
recommends that you check the level, and top and B. below the B mark, do not start the engine.
up if necessary, every 3 000 miles (5 000 kms). - If the level is above the MAX mark (risk
of damage to the engine), contact a
- If the level is below the MIN mark, you
must top up the engine oil.
229
Oil grade After topping-up the oil, the check when

Before topping-up the oil or changing the oil, switching on the ignition with the oil
check that the oil is the correct grade for your level indicator in the instrument panel
engine and conforms to the manufacturer's is not valid during the 30 minutes after
recommendations. topping up.
Topping-up the engine oil level Engine oil change

F Locate the oil filler cap in the engine Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule
compartment of your vehicle. for details of the interval for this operation.
For more information on the petrol or Diesel In order to maintain the reliability of the engine
engine, refer to the corresponding section. and emission control system, never use
F Unscrew the oil filler cap to reveal the filler additives in the engine oil.
aperture.
F Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any
spills on engine components (risk of fire).
F Wait a few minutes before checking the
level again using the dipstick.
F Add more oil if necessary.
F After checking the level, carefully refit the
oil filler cap and the dipstick in its tube.
230
Brake fluid level Coolant level Screenwash and headlamp

wash fluid
The coolant level should be close In the case of vehicles fitted with
to the "MAX" mark but should never headlamp washers, the low fluid level
exceed it. is indicated by an audible signal and
When the engine is warm, the temperature of a message in the instrument panel
the coolant is regulated by the fan. screen.
Top up the reservoir when you next
The cooling fan may start after switching stop the vehicle.
off the engine: take care with articles and
clothing that might be caught by the fan
blades.
Fluid specification
For optimum cleaning and to avoid freezing,
The brake fluid level must be In addition, as the cooling system is pressurised, this fluid must not be topped up with or
between the marking "A" (MAX wait at least one hour after switching off the replaced with plain water.
7
located on the remote reservoir) and engine before carrying out any work.
the marking "B" (MIN located on the To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew the cap In wintry conditions, the use of an ethyl alcohol
main reservoir). If it is not, check the by two turns to allow the pressure to drop. When or methanol base fluid is recommended.
brake pad wear. the pressure has dropped, remove the cap and
top up the level.
Changing the fluid
Refer to the personalised service schedule for Changing the coolant
your vehicle for details of the interval for this The coolant does not have to be replaced at routine services.
operation.
Fluid specification Fluid specification

The brake fluid must conform to the The coolant must conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations. manufacturer's recommendations.
231
Diesel additive level (Diesel Used products

engine with particle filter)
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or
A low additive level is indicated by fluids with the skin.
illumination of this warning lamp, Most of these fluids are harmful to
accompanied by an audible warning health or indeed very corrosive.
and a message in the instrument
panel screen.
Topping up Do not discard used oil or fluids into

This additive must be topped up by a sewers or onto the ground.
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop Take used oil to a PEUGEOT dealer or
without delay. a qualified workshop (France) or to an
authorised waste disposal site.
232
Checks
Unless otherwise indicated, check these components in accordance with the manufacturer's Particle filter (Diesel)
service schedule and according to your engine.
The start of saturation of the particle
Otherwise, have them checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
filter is indicated by the temporary
12 V battery Air filter and passenger compartment filter illumination of this warning lamp
accompanied by a message in the
The battery does not require any maintenance. Refer to the manufacturer's
multifunction screen.
However, check that the terminals are clean service schedule for details of the
and correctly tightened, particularly in summer replacement intervals for these
and winter. components. As soon as the traffic conditions permit,
regenerate the filter by driving at a
When carrying out work on the battery, refer Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty
speed of at least 40 mph (60 km/h) until
to the "12 V battery" section for details of the atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle (e.g.
the warning lamp goes off.
precautions to be taken before disconnecting city driving), replace them twice as often if
If the warning lamp stays on, this
the battery and following its reconnection. necessary.
indicates a low additive level.
A clogged passenger compartment filter may
For more information on checking
have an adverse effect on the performance
levels, refer to the corresponding
of the air conditioning system and generate
section.
undesirable odours.
7
On a new vehicle, the first particle
Oil filter filter regeneration operations may be
The presence of this label, in particular with Replace the oil filter each time the accompanied by a "burning" smell,
the Stop & Start system, indicates the use of engine oil is changed. which is perfectly normal.
a specific 12 V lead-acid battery with special Refer to the manufacturer's Following prolonged operation of the
technology and specification. The involvement service schedule for details of vehicle at very low speed or at idle,
of a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop the replacement interval for this you may, in exceptional circumstances,
is essential when replacing or disconnecting component. notice the emission of water vapour at
the battery. the exhaust on acceleration. This does
not affect the behaviour of the vehicle
or the environment.
233
Manual gearbox Brake pads Electric parking brake

The gearbox does not require any Brake wear depends on the style
maintenance (no oil change). of driving, particularly in the case This system does not require any
Refer to the manufacturer's service of vehicles used in town, over short routine servicing. However, in the
schedule for the checking interval for distances. It may be necessary to event of a problem, have the system
this component. have the condition of the brakes checked, even checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
between vehicle services. qualified workshop.
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in
For more information on the electric parking
the brake fluid level indicates that the brake
Automatic gearbox pads are worn.
brake, refer to the corresponding section.
The gearbox does not require any Brake disc wear Only use products recommended by
maintenance (no oil change).
PEUGEOT or products of equivalent
Refer to the manufacturer's service
quality and specification.
schedule for details of the level For information on checking brake
In order to optimise the operation of
checking interval for this component. disc wear, contact a PEUGEOT
units as important as those in the
braking system, PEUGEOT selects and
offers very specific products.
Parking brake After washing the vehicle, dampness,
or in wintry conditions, ice can form
If excessive travel or a loss of on the brake discs and pads: braking
effectiveness of this system is efficiency may be reduced. Make light
noticed, the parking brake must be brake applications to dry and defrost
checked, even between two services. the brakes.
Checking this system must be done by a

234
AdBlue® additive and SCR system

for BlueHDi Diesel engines
To assure respect for the environment and The AdBlue ® additive is held in a special
Once the AdBlue ® tank is empty, a
conformity with the new Euro 6 emissions tank located under the boot at the rear of
system required by regulations prevents
standard, without adversely affecting the the vehicle. It has a capacity of 17 litres: this
starting of the engine.
performance or fuel consumption of Diesel provides a driving range of about 12 500 miles
If the SCR is faulty, the level of
engines, PEUGEOT has taken the decision to (20 000 km), after which an alert is triggered
emissions from your vehicle will no
equip its vehicles with an effective system that warning you when the reserve remaining is
longer meet the Euro 6 standard: your
associates SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) enough for just 1 500 miles (2 400 km).
vehicle becomes polluting.
with a particle filter (FAP) for the treatment of
In the event of a confirmed fault
exhaust gases.
with the SCR system, you must go
During each scheduled service of your vehicle to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop as soon as possible: after
Presentation of the SCR system by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop,
a running distance of 650 miles
the AdBlue ® additive tank is refilled in order to
Using an additive called AdBlue ® containing allow normal operation of the SCR system. (1 100 km), a system will be triggered
urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85% automatically to prevent engine starting.
of nitrous oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and
7
water, which are harmless to health and the
environment. If the estimated mileage between two services
is greater than 12 500 miles (20 000 km), we
recommend that you go to a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop to have the necessary
top-up carried out.
235
Range indicators In the event of the risk of non-starting related to a lack of AdBlue®
Once the AdBlue ® tank is on reserve or after Remaining range greater than 1 500 miles (2 400 km) Remaining range between 350 and 1500 miles (600 and 2 400 km)
detection of a fault with the SCR emissions When switching on the ignition, there is no
control system, when the ignition is switched automatic display of range in the instrument
on, an indicator displays an estimate of the panel.
distance that can be covered, the range, before
engine starting is prevented. When switching on the ignition, the
In the event of simultaneous system fault and UREA warning lamp comes on, accompanied
low AdBlue ® level, the shortest range figure is by an audible signal and the display of a
the one displayed. message (e.g.: "Top up emissions additive:
Starting prevented in 900 miles") indicating
Pressing this button will display the remaining the remaining range expressed in miles or
range. kilometres.
You can access this information in the touch When driving, the message is displayed every
screen, if your vehicle has one. 200 miles (300 km) until the additive tank has
been topped-up.
F Select the "Driving assistance" Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
menu. workshop to have the AdBlue ® tank topped-up.
F Then select "Diagnostic". You can also top-up the tank yourself.
For more information on topping-up the
AdBlue ® additive, refer to the corresponding
section.
The engine start prevention system

required by regulations is activated The range at that moment is then displayed.
automatically once the AdBlue ® tank is
empty. Above 3 000 miles (5 000 km), the value is not
specified.
236
Remaining range between 0 and 350 miles (0 and 600 km) Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue® additive
When switching on the ignition, the SERVICE When switching on the ignition, the SERVICE
warning lamp comes on and the UREA warning warning lamp comes on and the UREA warning
lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible
signal and the display of a message (e.g. "Top signal and the display of the message "Top up
up emissions additive: Starting prevented in emissions additive: Starting prevented".
350 miles") indicating the remaining range The AdBlue ® tank is empty: the system required
expressed in miles or kilometres. by regulations prevents engine starting.
When driving, the message is displayed every
30 seconds until the additive tank has been
topped-up.
7
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified To be able to start the engine,
workshop to have the AdBlue ® tank topped-up. we recommend that you call on a
You can also top-up the tank yourself. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
Otherwise you will not be able to restart your workshop for the top-up required.
engine. If you carry out the top-up yourself, it
is essential to add at least 3.8 litres of
AdBlue ® to the tank.
For more information on topping-up the AdBlue ® additive, refer to the corresponding section.
237
In the event of a fault with the the SCR emissions control system
A system that prevents engine starting is activated automatically from 650 miles (1 100 km) after confirmation of a fault with the SCR emissions
control system. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
In the event of the detection of a fault During an authorised driving phase (between Starting prevented
650 miles and 0 miles) (1 100 km and 0 km)
The UREA, SERVICE and diagnostic warning If a fault with the SCR system is confirmed Every time the ignition is switched on, the
lamps comes on, accompanied by an audible (after 30 miles (50 km) covered with the SERVICE and engine diagnostic warning
signal and the display of a message "Emissions permanent display of the message signalling lamps come on and the UREA warning lamp
fault" to signal a fault with the emissions control a fault), the SERVICE and engine diagnostic flashes, accompanied by an audible signal and
system. warning lamps come on and the UREA the display of the message "Emissions fault:
The alert is triggered when driving when the warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an Starting prevented".
fault is detected for the first time, then when audible signal and the display of a message
switching on the ignition for subsequent (e.g.: "Emissions fault: Starting prevented in You have exceeded the authorised
journeys, while the fault persists. 150 miles") indicating the remaining range driving limit: the starting prevention
express in miles or kilometres. system inhibits engine starting.
While driving, the message is displayed every
30 seconds while the fault with the SCR system
persists. To be able to start the engine, you must call on
If it is a temporary fault, the alert
The alert is repeated when switching on the a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
disappears during the next journey,
after self-diagnosis of the SCR system. ignition.
You should go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop as soon as possible.
Otherwise, you will not be able to restart your
engine.
238
Topping-up the AdBlue® additive

Filling the AdBlue ® tank is an operation Precautions in use
included in every routine service on your
The AdBlue ® additive is an urea-based Use only AdBlue ® additive that meets the
vehicle by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
solution. This liquid is non-flammable, ISO 22241 standard.
workshop.
colourless and odourless (kept in a cool area).
Nevertheless, given the capacity of the tank,
In the event of contact with the skin, wash
it may be necessary to top-up the additive Never dilute the additive with water.
the affected area with soap and water. In the
between services, more particularly if an alert Never pour the additive into the Diesel
event of contact with the eyes, wash (irrigate)
(warning lamps and a message) signals the fuel tank.
the eyes with large amounts of water or with
requirement.
an eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes.
You can got to a PEUGEOT dealer or a
If a burning sensation or irritation persists, get
qualified workshop.
medical attention.
If you envisage topping-up yourself, please
If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth
read the following warnings carefully.
with clean water and then drink plenty of water.
In certain conditions (high ambient
temperature, for example), the risk of release
7
of ammonia cannot be excluded: do not inhale
Important
the product. Ammonia vapour has en irritant
If your vehicle's AdBlue ® tank is
effect on mucous membranes (eyes, nose and
completely empty (which is confirmed
throat). The supply in a non-drip bottle simplifies
by the alert messages and the
toping-up. You can obtain 1.89 litre (half a US
impossibility of starting the engine)
gallon) bottles from a PEUGEOT dealer or a
you must add at least 3.8 litres
qualified workshop.
(so two 1.89 litre bottles).
Keep AdBlue ® out of the reach of
children, in its original bottle.
Never transfer AdBlue ® to another Never top-up from an AdBlue ®
container: it would lose its purity. dispenser reserved for heavy goods
vehicles.
239
Recommendations on storage Procedure

AdBlue ® freezes at about -11°C and Before topping-up, ensure that the vehicle is
deteriorates above 25°C. It is recommended parked on a flat and level surface.
that bottles be stored in a cool area and In wintry conditions, ensure that the
protected from direct sunlight. temperature of the vehicle is above -11°C.
Under these conditions, the additive can be Otherwise the AdBlue ® may be frozen and
kept for at least a year. so cannot be poured into its tank. Park your
If the additive has frozen, it can be used once it vehicle in a warmer area for a few hours to
has completely thawed out. allow the top-up to be carried out.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the

Never store bottles of AdBlue ® in your key, or if your vehicle has one, press F For access to the AdBlue ® tank, raise the
vehicle. the START/STOP button to switch off boot carpet then, depending on equipment,
the engine. lift out the spare wheel and/or the storage
box.
F Without pressing, turn the black cap a

quarter turn anti-clockwise and lift it off.
F Turn the blue cap a 6th of a turn anti-

clockwise.
F Lift off the cap.
240
If any additive is split or splashed, wash Important: when topping-up after

immediately with cold water or wipe with running out of additive, signalled
a damp cloth. by the message "Top up emissions
If the additive has crystallised, clean it additive: Starting prevented", you
off using a sponge and hot water. must wait for about 5 minutes before
F Obtain a bottle of AdBlue ®. After first switching on the ignition, without
checking the use-by date, read carefully opening the driver's door, unlocking
the instructions on use on the label before F Refit the blue cap to the tank and turn it a the vehicle, introducing the key
pouring the contents of the bottle into your 6th of a turn clockwise, to its stop. into the ignition switch, or placing
vehicle's AdBlue ® tank. F Refit the black cap and turn it a quarter of the key of the "Keyless Entry and
a turn clockwise without pressing. Ensure Starting" system inside the vehicle.
that the indicator on the cap lines up with Switch on the ignition, then wait for
the indicator on the support. 10 seconds before starting the engine.
F After emptying the bottle, wipe away any
F Depending on equipment, return the spare
7
spillage around the tank filler using a damp
wheel and/or the storage box to the bottom
cloth.
of the boot.
F Refit the boot carpet and close the tailgate. Never dispose of AdBlue ® additive
Freezing of the AdBlue ® additive bottles in the household waste. Place
them in a special container provided
The AdBlue ® additive freezes at this purpose or take them to your dealer.
temperatures below around -11°C.
The SCR system includes a heater
for the AdBlue ® tank, allowing you to
continue driving in very cold conditions.
241
Version with bass woofer unit
- Carefully disengage the wiring harness F Place the bass woofer unit to the side of F Remove or raise the storage well.
from its housing to give a little more free the boot.
length.
- Remove the yellow screw retaining the For reassembly, first slacken the yellow screw
woofer unit. a few turns.
242
In the event of a breakdown
Warning triangle (stowing)

This safety equipment should be used in Placing the triangle in the
addition to the hazard warning lamps.
Its presence in the vehicle is mandatory.
road
The storage location for a folded triangle or its

box is under the boot floor. F Place the triangle behind the vehicle, as
required by the legislation in force in your
country.
Before leaving your vehicle to set up Refer to the manufacturer's instructions on
8
and install the triangle, switch on the unfolding and installing supplied with the
hazard warning lamps and put on your triangle.
high visibility vest.
The triangle is available as an

accessory; contact a PEUGEOT dealer
243
Temporary puncture repair kit

This kit consists of a compressor and a sealant
cartridge.
It allows the temporary repair of a tyre.
You are then able to go to the nearest garage.
It is designed to repair most punctures which
could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread
or shoulder.
Its compressor can be used to check and
adjust the pressure of the tyre.
List of tools The tyre inflation pressures are given on

this label.
Access to the kit These tools are specific to your vehicle and can
vary according to equipment. Do not use them
for other purposes.
1. 12 V compressor.
Contains a sealant cartridge for the
The vehicle's electric system allows the
temporary repair of a tyre and can also be
connection of a compressor for long
used for adjusting tyre pressures.
enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture
2. Towing eye.
repair or for inflating a small inflatable
accessory.
For more information on towing refer to
This kit is installed in the storage box, under the

boot floor.
244
Description of the kit
A. "Sealant" or "Air" position selector. F. Sealant cartridge.

B. On "I" / off "O" switch. G. White pipe with cap for repair.
C. Deflation button. H. Black pipe for inflation.
D. Pressure gauge (in bar and psi). I. Speed limit sticker.
E. Compartment housing:
- a cable with adaptor for 12 V socket,
- various inflation adaptors for
8
accessories, such as balls, bicycle
tyres... The speed limit sticker I must be affixed
to the vehicle's steering wheel to remind
you that a wheel is in temporary use.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h) when driving with a tyre
repaired using this type of kit.
245
Repair procedure
1. Sealing
F Switch off the ignition. F Uncoil the white pipe G fully. F Connect the compressor's electric plug to
F Unscrew the cap from the white pipe. the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Turn the selector A to the F Connect the white pipe to the valve of the F Start the vehicle and leave the engine
"sealant" position. tyre to be repaired. running.
F Check that the switch B is in position "O".
Avoid removing any foreign bodies Take care, this product is harmful Do not start the compressor before
which have penetrated into the tyre. (e.g. ethylene-glycol, colophony...) if connecting the white pipe to the tyre
swallowed and causes irritation to the eyes. valve: the sealant product would be
Keep this product out of the reach of expelled through the pipe.
children.
246
F Switch on the compressor by moving F Remove the kit and screw the cap back on
2. Inflation
the switch B to position "I" until the tyre the white pipe.
pressure reaches 2.0 bars. Take care to avoid staining your vehicle F Turn the selector A to the "air"
The sealant is injected into the tyre under with traces of fluid. Keep the kit to hand. position.
pressure; do not disconnect the pipe from F Drive immediately for approximately
the valve during this operation (risk of three miles (five kilometres), at reduced F Uncoil the black pipe H fully.
splashing). speed (between 15 and 35 mph (20 and F Connect the black pipe to the valve of the
60 km/h)), to plug the puncture. wheel.
8
F Stop to check the repair and the tyre
pressure using the kit.
If after around 5 to 7 minutes the
pressure is not attained, this indicates
that the tyre is not repairable; contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop for assistance.
247
Removing the cartridge
F Stow the black pipe.

F Detach the angled base from the white pipe.
F Support the compressor vertically.
F Unscrew the cartridge from the bottom.
F Connect the compressor's electric plug to F Adjust the pressure using the compressor Beware of discharges of fluid.
the vehicle's 12 V socket. (to inflate: switch B in position "I"; to The expiry date of the fluid is indicated
F Start the vehicle again and leave the deflate: switch B in position "O" and press on the cartridge.
engine running. button C), in accordance with the vehicle's The sealant cartridge is designed for
tyre pressure label (located on the left single use; even if only partly used, it
hand door aperture). must be replaced.
A loss of pressure indicates that the After use, do not discard the cartridge
puncture has not been fully plugged; into the environment, take it to an
As soon as possible, go to a PEUGEOT
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified authorised waste disposal site or a
workshop for assistance. PEUGEOT dealer.
You must inform the technician that you
F Remove and stow the kit. Do not forget to obtain a new sealant
have used this kit. After inspection, the
F Drive at reduced speed (50 mph [80 km/h] cartridge, available from PEUGEOT
technician will advise you on whether
max) limiting the distance travelled to dealers or from a qualified workshop.
the tyre can be repaired or if it must be
approximately 120 miles (200 km).
replaced.
248
Checking tyre pressures /

inflating accessories
You can also use the compressor, without F Connect the compressor's electrical
Should the pressure of one or more
injecting any product, to: connector to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
tyres be adjusted, it is necessary to
- check or adjust the pressure of your tyres, F Start the vehicle and let the engine run.
reinitialise the under-inflation detection
- inflate other accessories (balls, bicycle F Adjust the pressure using the compressor
system.
tyres...). (to inflate: switch B in position "I"; to
For more information on under-inflation
deflate: switch B in position "O" and press
8
detection, refer to the corresponding
button C), according to the vehicle's tyre
F Turn the selector A to the "Air" section.
pressure label or the accessory's pressure
position. label.
F Remove the kit then stow it.
F Uncoil the black pipe H fully.
F Connect the black pipe to the valve of the
wheel or accessory.
If necessary, fit one of the adaptors
supplied with the kit first.
249
Changing a wheel
Procedure for changing a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre for the spare wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle.
Access to the tooling

3. "Bolt cover" tool.
For removing the bolt protectors (covers)
on alloy wheels.
4. Socket for the security bolts (located in the
glove box).
For adapting the wheelbrace to the special
"security" bolts.
5. Towing eye.
The tools are installed in the boot under the

floor.
For more information on towing, refer to
List of tools
These tools are specific to your vehicle and can
vary according to the level of equipment. Do
not use them for other purposes. Wheel with trim
1. Wheelbrace.
When refitting the wheel, refit the trim
For removing the wheel trim and removing
starting by placing its notch facing the
the wheel bolts.
valve and press around its edge with
2. Jack with integral handle.
the palm of your hand.
For raising the vehicle.
250
Access to the spare wheel
The spare wheel is located in the boot under

the floor.
Depending on the country of sale, the spare
wheel may be steel, alloy or of the "space- Putting the wheel back in place
saver" type. F Put the wheel back in its housing. F Put the box back in place in the centre of
F Unscrew the (coloured) central bolt by a the wheel and clip it.
few turns then put it in place in the centre F Put the polystyrene storage box back in
of the wheel. place.
F Tighten fully until the central bolt clicks to
retain the wheel correctly.
8
Taking out the wheel
F Unscrew the (coloured) central bolt.
F Raise the spare wheel towards you from
the rear.
F Take the wheel out of the boot.
251
Removing a wheel
Parking the vehicle
Immobilise the vehicle where it does not
block traffic: the ground must be level,
stable and not slippery.
Apply the parking brake unless it has
been programmed to automatic mode,
switch off the ignition and engage first
gear to block the wheels.
Check that the braking warning lamp
and the P warning lamp in the parking
brake control lever come on.
The occupants must get out of the F Remove the bolt cover from each of F Position the foot of the jack on the ground,
vehicle and wait where they are safe. the bolts using the tool 3 (according to ensuring that it is directly below the
Never go underneath a vehicle raised equipment). vehicle's jacking point A or B, the one
using a jack; use an axle stand. F Fit the security socket 4 on the closest to the wheel to be changed.
wheelbrace 1 to slacken the security bolt
(if fitted).
F Slacken the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 1 only.
Do not use:
- the jack for any other purpose than
lifting the vehicle,
- a jack other than the one supplied
by the manufacturer.
252
F Extend the jack 2 until its head comes into contact with the jacking point A or B used, with the F Remove the bolts and store them in a clean
contact surface A or B on the vehicle correctly engaged with the central part of the head of the jack. place.
F Remove the wheel.
F Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient space between the wheel and the ground to admit the
spare (not punctured) wheel easily.
Ensure that the jack is stable. If the ground is slippery or loose, the jack may slip or drop -
8
Risk of injury!
Ensure that the jack is positioned only at one of the jacking points A or B under the vehicle,
making sure that the vehicle's contact surface is centred on the head of the jack. Otherwise
there is a risk of damage to the vehicle and/or of the jack dropping - Risk of injury!
253
Fitting a wheel
F Put the wheel in place on the hub. F Lower the vehicle fully.
Fitting the "space-saver"
F Screw in the bolts fully by hand. F Fold the jack 2 and detach it.
spare wheel
F Pre-tighten the security bolt using the
If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security
when tightening the bolts on fitting, it socket 4 (according to equipment).
is normal to notice that the washers F Pre-tighten the other bolts using the
do not come into contact with the wheelbrace 1 only.
"space-saver" spare wheel. The wheel
is secured by the conical surface of
each bolt.
254
After changing a wheel

To store the punctured wheel in the boot
correctly, first remove the central cover.
When using the "space-saver" type
spare wheel, do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Have the tightening of the bolts and the
pressure of the spare wheel checked
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop without delay.
Have the punctured wheel repaired
F Tighten the security bolt using the
and refitted to the vehicle as soon as
wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security The tyre inflation pressures are given on
possible.
socket 4 (according to equipment). this label.
If your vehicle has tyre under-inflation
F Tighten the other bolts using the
detection, check the tyre pressures then
wheelbrace 1 only.
F Refit the bolt covers on each of the bolts
(according to equipment).
8
F Store the tools in the box.
255
Changing a bulb
Front lamps
Model with halogen headlamps Model with "full LED" technology Front fog lamps (H11)
1. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W). headlamps
2. Main beam headlamps (HB3). 1. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps (light
3. Direction indicators (PY21-21W). emitting diodes - LEDs).
4. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps 2. Dipped beam headlamps (light emitting
(light emitting diodes - LEDs). diodes - full LEDs).
Direction indicators
3. Main beam headlamps (light emitting (GT version)
For H7 type bulbs with lugs... take care to diodes - full LEDs). For the replacement of this type of LED lamp,
observe their correct installation so as to 4. Direction indicators (PY21-21W). contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
ensure the best lighting performance.
workshop.
A replacement kit for the LEDs is available from
PEUGEOT dealers.
256
The headlamps are fitted with In some weather conditions (e.g. low
polycarbonate glass with a protective temperature or humidity), the presence
coating: of misting on the internal surface of the
F do not clean them using a dry glass of the headlamps and rear lamps
or abrasive cloth, nor with a is normal; it disappears after the lamps
detergent or solvent product, have been on for a few minutes.
F use a sponge and soapy water or a
pH neutral product,
F when using a high pressure washer
on persistent marks, do not keep
the lance directed towards the
lamps or their edges for too long,
Daytime running lamps / sidelamps
so as not to damage their protective
coating and seals.
For the replacement of this type of LED lamp
and lighting guides, contact a PEUGEOT dealer
Changing a bulb should only be done
A replacement kit for the LEDs is available from
after the headlamp has been switched
PEUGEOT dealers.
8
off for several minutes (risk of serious
burns).
F Do not touch the bulb directly with
your fingers, use a lint-free cloth.
It is imperative to use only anti-
ultraviolet (UV) type bulbs to avoid
damaging the headlamp.
Always replace a failed bulb with a
new bulb with the same type and
specification.
257
Tips for removing the headlamp (halogen model)
Dipped beam headlamps Main beam headlamps

To allow the headlamp to be moved forward
a few centimetres for access to the bulbs, (halogen model) (halogen model)
proceed as follows: F Remove the protective plastic cover by F Remove the protective plastic cover by
F Move the orange clip towards the rear pulling on the tab. pulling on the tab.
then while pressing on the black part F Disconnect the bulb connector. F Turn the connector (with its bulb) towards
(located above the orange clip) pull on the F Disengage the two springs (press then the top (1/4 turn).
connector. move them outwards). F Remove the bulb by pulling it out and
F Remove the two screws holding the lamp. F Extract the bulb by pulling and change it. change it.
For reassembly, carry out these operations in
F Disengage the rear pin then the front For reassembly, carry out these operations in
reverse order.
centre piece. reverse order.
F Move the lamp forwards.
Be aware that the area behind the
right-hand headlamp (facing forwards)
may be hot, with the risk of burns
(overflow pipe).
258
Direction indicators Daytime running lamps / Direction indicators

(halogen model) sidelamps ("full LED" technology model)
("full LED" technology model)
F Unscrew the bulb holder (1/4 turn). For the replacement of this type of "full LED"
Faster flashing of a direction indicator
F Remove the bulb holder. light emitting diode lamps, contact a PEUGEOT
warning lamp (left or right) indicates a
F Change the failed bulb. dealer or a qualified workshop.
failed bulb on that side.
8
reverse order. The direction indicator bulb is located below
the front lamp.
Faster flashing of a direction indicator F Unclip the finisher by pulling at the top
warning lamp (left or right) indicates a (cut-out).
failed bulb on that side. F Unscrew the bulb holder (1/4 turn).
F Change the failed bulb.
reverse order.
259
Door mirror spotlamps
You should contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a

qualified workshop for the replacement of the
light emitting diode - LED.
Front foglamps
F Unclip the finisher by pulling at the top F Disconnect the connector. Integrated direction indicator
(cut-out). F Unscrew the bulb holder (1/4 turn). side repeaters
F Remove the two screws to remove the unit F Remove the bulb holder.
You should contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
from its housing. F Change the failed bulb.
qualified workshop for the replacement of these
bulbs.
reverse order, pressing on the finisher to refit it.
260
Rear lamps
(hatchback)
1. Sidelamps (light emitting diodes - LEDs). Reversing lamps, direction

2. Reversing lamps (W16W). indicators (on the wings)
3. Direction indicators (PY21W amber).
F Open the tailgate then remove the access F Disconnect the lamp connector.
4. Brake lamps (light emitting diodes - LEDs).
cover. F Remove the lamp fixing nut.
5. Foglamps (P21W).
F Carefully remove the lamp unit from
outside.
8
F Unscrew the bulb holder (a quarter of a
turn) and change the bulb.
reverse order.
Light emitting
diodes-LEDs
For replacement, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or qualified workshop.
261
Foglamp (tailgate)
F Open the tailgate and then remove the F Unclip the left and right access covers.
large plastic cover. F Remove the screws located in each
opening.
F Unclip the boot trim for access to the lamp
connector.
F Disconnect the lamp connector.
F Remove the lamp fixing nut.
F Carefully remove the lamp from the
outside.
F Unscrew the bulb holder (a quarter of a
turn) and change the bulb.
reverse order.
262
Rear lamps
(SW)

F Remove the sealing foam.
1. Sidelamps (light emitting diodes - LEDs).
F Unclip the bulb holder by pressing on the
2. Direction indicators (PY21W amber).
two tongues.
3. Brake lamps (light emitting diodes - LEDs).
F Replace the bulb.
4. Reversing lamps (W16W).
5. Foglamps (P21W).
Direction indicators reverse order.
8
(on the wings)
F Open the tailgate then remove the access
Light emitting cover.
diodes-LEDs F Remove the two lamp fixing nut (pipe
spanner or socket recommended).
For replacement, contact a PEUGEOT
F Disengage the retaining clip, carefully
dealer or qualified workshop.
removing the lamp unit from outside.
263
F Carefully remove the lamp from the

outside.
F Foglamp: unclip the bulb holder by
pressing on the two tongues then replace
the bulb.
Reversing lamp, rear foglamp F Reversing lamp: turn the bulb holder a
(tailgate) quarter of a turn then replace the bulb.
F Open the tailgate and then remove the reverse order.
access cover.
F Remove the lamp fixing nut.
264
Third brake lamp (light emitting Number plate lamps

diodes-LED) (W5W)
For the replacement of this type of lamp, F Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified cutouts in the the lens.
workshop. F Push it outwards to unclip it.
F Remove the lens.
8
F Change the faulty bulb.
To refit, press on the lens to clip it in place.
265
Changing a fuse
Access to the tools Changing a fuse
Before changing a fuse:
F the cause of the failure must be identified
and rectified,
F all electrical consumers must be switched
off,
F the vehicle must be immobilised with the
ignition off, Good Failed
F identify the failed fuse using the tables and
layout drawings in the following pages.
The extraction tweezer is fitted to the back of To replace a fuse, you must:
the dashboard fusebox cover. F use the special tweezer to extract the fuse
from its housing and check the condition of
its filament, Tweezer
F Unclip the cover by pulling at the top left, F always replace the failed fuse with a fuse
then right. of the same rating (same colour); using a
F Disengage the cover completely and turn it different rating could cause faults (risk of
over. fire). The replacement of a fuse not shown in
F Remove the tweezer from the back of the If the fuse fails again soon after replacement, the tables below may cause a serious
cover to which it is fitted. have the vehicle's electrical system checked by malfunction of your vehicle. Contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
266
Installing electrical PEUGEOT will not accept responsibility

accessories for the cost incurred in repairing your
vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions
Your vehicle's electrical system is
resulting from the installation of
designed to operate with standard or
accessories not supplied and not
optional equipment.
recommended by PEUGEOT and
Before installing other electrical
not installed in accordance with its
equipment or accessories on your
instructions, in particular when the
vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
combined consumption of all of the
additional equipment connected
exceeds 10 milliamperes.
267
Dashboard fuses Version 1 (Full)

Fuse Rating
Functions
N° (A)
F4 5 Emergency and assistance calls.
F6 A or B 15 Audio system, touch screen, CD player, navigation.
F11 5 "Keyless Entry and starting" system
F13 10 Front 12 V accessory socket.
F14 10 12 V accessory socket in the boot.
F16 3 Glove box lamp, rear courtesy lamp.
The fusebox is placed in the lower dashboard F17 3 Vanity mirror lamp, front courtesy lamp.
(left-hand side).
F19 5 Instrument panel.
Access to the fuses F21 10 Multifunction screen, air conditioning.
F Unclip the cover by pulling at top left, then F22 5 Reversing camera, parking sensors.
right.
F24 3 Rain and sunshine sensor
F25 5 Airbags.
F28 A or B 15 Audio system (battery +).
F30 20 Rear wiper.
F31 30 Locks.
F32 10 Hi-Fi amplifier.
F33 3 Memorisation of driving positions.
F34 5 Electric power steering.
F35 3 Seat belts not fastened display.

268
Version 2 (Eco)
Fuse Rating
Functions
N° (A)
F9 5 Emergency and assistance calls.
F13 5 Reversing camera and parking sensors
F15 15 12 V accessory socket.
F16 15 Cigarette lighter.
F17 15 Audio system.
F18 20 Touch screen, CD player, audio and navigation system.
F19 5 Rain, sunshine sensor.
F20 5 Airbags.
F21 5 Instrument panel.
F22/F24 30 Interior, exterior, front and rear locks.
F23 5 Glove box lamp, vanity mirror, front and rear courtesy lamps.
8
F25/F27 15 Front/rear screenwash pump.
F26 15 Horn.
F30 15 Rear wiper.
269
Engine compartment Version 1 (Full)

fuses Fuesbox 1
Fuse Rating
Functions
N° (A)
F12 5 Park Assist control unit.
F14 25 Front and rear screenwash pump
F15 5 Power steering.
F19 30 Front wiper motor.
F20 15 Front and rear screenwash motors.

The fusebox is located in the engine F21 20 Headlamp wash.
compartment near the battery.
F22 15 Horn.
Access to the fuses F23 15 Right hand main beam headlamp.
F Unclip the cover.
F24 15 Left hand main beam headlamp.
F Change the fuse.
F When you have finished, close the cover
carefully to ensure correct sealing of the
fusebox.
270
Fuesbox 2
Fuse Rating
Functions
N° (A)
F8 30 Diesel emissions control system (AdBlue ®).
F10 5 Automatic gearbox.
F12 15 Automatic gearbox.
Version 2 (Eco)
Fuse Rating
Functions
N° (A)
F13 5 Built-in systems interface.
F16 15 Front foglamps.
F18 10 Right hand main beam headlamp.
F19 10 Left hand main beam headlamp.
8
F25 40 Headlamp wash relay (aftermarket fitment).
F27 25 Built-in systems interface.
F28 30 Diesel emissions control system (AdBlue ®).
F29 30 Front wiper motor.
Pre-heater plugs (Diesel), additional programmable heating

F30 80
(aftermarket fitment), headlamp wash pump.
271
12 V battery
Procedure for starting the engine using another battery or charging a discharged battery.
Before doing any work

Immobilise the vehicle: apply the
parking brake, put the gearbox in
neutral, then switch off the ignition.
Check that all electrical equipment is
switched off.
The presence of this label, in particular
with the Stop & Start system, indicates
the use of a 12 V lead-acid battery with
Disconnecting the (+) cable
special technology and specification; Access to the battery F Raise the locking tab D fully to release the
the involvement of a PEUGEOT dealer
or a qualified workshop is essential cable terminal clamp E.
when replacing or disconnecting
the battery. Reconnecting the (+) cable
F Position the open clamp E of the cable on
the positive post (+) of the battery.
F Press vertically on the clamp E to position
After refitting the battery, the Stop & Start it correctly on the battery.
system will only be active after a continuous F Lock the clamp by spreading the
period of immobilisation of the vehicle, positioning lug and then lowering the tab D.
a period which depends on the climatic
conditions and the state of charge of the
The battery is located under the bonnet.
battery (up to about 8 hours). Do not apply excessive force on the
To gain access to it:
F open the bonnet using the interior release tab as locking will not be possible if the
lever, then the exterior safety catch, clamp is not positioned correctly; start
F secure the bonnet stay, the procedure again.
F remove the plastic cover on the (+) terminal.
272
Starting using another battery

When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
Some functions are not available if the
engine can be started using a slave battery
battery is not sufficiently charged.
(external or on another vehicle) and jump lead
cables.
First check that the slave battery has a

nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity Before disconnecting the battery
at least equal to that of the discharged Wait 2 minutes after switching off the ignition
battery. before disconnecting the battery.
Do not try to start the engine by Close the windows and the doors before
connecting a battery charger. disconnecting the battery.
Do not disconnect the (+) terminal when
the engine is running.
F Remove the plastic cover from

the (+) terminal, if your vehicle has one.
Following reconnection of the
F Connect the red cable to the positive
battery
terminal (+) of the flat battery A, then to the Following reconnection of the battery, switch on
F Operate the starter on the broken down the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to
positive terminal (+) of the slave battery B.
vehicle and let the engine run permit initialisation of the electronic systems.
F Connect one end of the green or black
8
If the engine does not start straight However, if problems remain following this
cable to the negative terminal (-) of the
away, switch off the ignition and wait a operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
slave battery B (or earth point on the other
few moments before trying again. qualified workshop.
vehicle).
F Wait until the engine returns to idle then Referring to the corresponding section, you
F Connect the other end of the green or black
disconnect the jump lead cables in the must yourself reinitialise (depending on
cable to the earth point C on the broken
reverse order. version):
down vehicle (or on the engine mounting).
F Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if - the remote control key,
F Start the engine of the vehicle with the
your vehicle has one. - the electric blind(s),
good battery and leave it running for a
few minutes. - ...
273
Charging the battery using The batteries contain harmful substances Protect your eyes and face before
a battery charger such as sulphuric acid and lead. They handling the battery.
must be disposed of in accordance All operations on the battery must be
With Stop & Start, the battery does not with regulations and must not, in any carried out in a well ventilated area and
have to be disconnected for charging. circumstances, be discarded with household away from naked flames and sources
waste. of sparks, so as to avoid the risk of
Take used remote control batteries and explosion or fire.
F Disconnect the battery from the vehicle. vehicle batteries to a special collection point. Do not try to charge a frozen battery;
F Follow the instructions for use provided by the battery must first be thawed out to
the manufacturer of the charger. avoid the risk of explosion. If the battery
F Connect the battery starting with the It is advisable to disconnect the battery has been frozen, before charging have
negative terminal (-). if the vehicle is to be left unused for it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
F Check that the terminals and connectors more than one month. qualified workshop who will check that
are clean. If they are covered with sulphate the internal components have not been
(whitish or greenish deposit), remove them damaged and the casing is not cracked,
and clean them. which could cause a leak of toxic and
Do not push the vehicle to start the corrosive acid.
engine if your vehicle has an automatic Do not reverse the polarity and use only
gearbox. a 12 V charger.
Do not disconnect the terminals while
the engine is running.
Do not charge the batteries without
disconnecting the terminals first.
Wash your hands afterwards.
274
Towing
Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for towing another vehicle using a removable towing eye.
Access to the tooling Towing your vehicle

Put the gear lever into neutral.
The failure to follow this requirement
may lead to damage to components
of the braking system and the lack
of braking assistance on restarting
the engine.
F On the front bumper, press the cover

The towing eye is installed in the boot under (as shown above) to unclip it.
the floor. F Screw the towing eye in fully.
To gain access to it: F Install the towing arm.
F open the boot, F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the
F raise the floor, towed vehicle.
F remove the towing eye from the holder. F Move off gently and drive slowly over a
8
short distance only.
275
Towing another vehicle General recommendations

Observe the legislation in force in your country.
Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is higher than that of the towed vehicle.
The driver must remain at the wheel of the towed vehicle and must have a valid driving licence.
When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, always use an approved towing
arm; rope and straps are prohibited.
The towing vehicle must move off gently.
When towing a vehicle with the engine off, there is no longer any power assistance for
braking or steering.
In the following cases, you must always call on a professional recovery service:
- vehicle broken down on a motorway or fast road,
- four-wheel drive vehicle,
- when it is not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, unlock the steering, or release
F On the rear bumper, press the cover
the parking brake,
(as shown above) to unclip it.
- towing with only two wheels on the ground,
F Screw the towing eye in fully.
- where there is no approved towing arm available...
F Install the towing arm.
F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the
towed vehicle.
F Move off gently and drive slowly over a For more information on the electric parking brake (brake released), refer to the
short distance only. corresponding section.
276
Running out of fuel (Diesel)

On vehicles fitted with Diesel engines, the fuel 1.6 HDi engine BlueHDi engine
system must be primed if you run out of fuel.
F Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of
For all versions other than BlueHDi, refer to the
Diesel.
corresponding engine compartment view.
F Switch on the ignition (without starting the
engine).
F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the
ignition.
F Repeat the operation 10 times.
(except BlueHDi) F Operate the starter to run the engine.
For more information on the Diesel
F Add at least five litres of Diesel fuel to the
misfuel prevention device, refer to the
tank.
F Open the bonnet.
F If necessary, unclip the styling cover for
access to the priming pump.
F Squeeze and release the priming pump
If the engine does not start first time, repeatedly until resistance is felt (there
don't keep trying but start the procedure may be resistance at the first press).
again from the beginning. F Operate the starter to start the engine
(if the engine does not start at the first
attempt, wait around 15 seconds before
8
trying again).
F If the engine does not start after a
few attempts, operate the priming pump
again then start the engine.
F Refit the styling cover and clip it in place.
F Close the bonnet.
277
Technical data
Petrol engines and gearboxes

1.2 litre
Engine PureTech 1.2 litre PureTech 110 1.2 litre PureTech 130 S&S
82
Manual Manual Manual EAT6 automatic

Gearbox
(5-speed) (5-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed)
Model code LPHMZ LPHNZ - LRHNZ LPHNY - LRHNY LPHNY - LRHNY

Body style Hatchback Hatchback SW Hatchback SW Hatchback SW
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 199 1 199 1 199
Bore x stroke (mm) 75 x 90.5 75 x 90.5 75 x 90.5
Max power: EU standard (kW)* 60 81 96
Max power engine speed (rpm) 5 750 5 500 5 500
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 118 205 230
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 2 750 1 500 1 750
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
Catalytic converter yes yes yes
Oil capaciy (in litres)
Engine (with replacement of the filter cartridge) 3.25 3.5 3.5
* The maximum power corresponds to the type approved value on a test bed, under conditions defined by European legislation
(directive 1999/99/EC).
278
Technical data
Engine 1.6 litre VTi 115 1.6 litre THP 135** / 150*** / 165***
Gearbox Manual (5-speed) EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
Model code LWNFP - LXNFP L35GL / L35GX / L35GY - L45GL / L45GX / L45GY
Body style Hatchback SW Hatchback SW
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 587 1 598
Bore x stroke (mm) 78.5 x 82 77 x 85.8
Max power: EU standard (kW)* 85 / 115 99.3 / 110 / 121.4
Max power engine speed (rpm) 6 050 6 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 150 221 / 240 / 240
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 4 000 1 400
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded
Catalytic converter yes yes
Oil capacity (in litres)
Engine (with replacement of the filter cartridge) 3.5 4.25
(directive 1999/99/EC).
9
** For Russia.
*** Outside Europe.
279
Technical data
GT and GTi petrol engines and gearboxes

1.6 litre THP 250 /
1.6 litre THP 205 S&S
Engine 270 S&S
GT
GTi
Manual
Gearbox Manual (6-speed)
(6-speed)
Model code L35GT - L45GT L35GP / L35GN

Body style Hatchback SW Hatchback
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 598 1 598
Bore x stroke (mm) 77 x 85.8 77 x 85.8
Max power: EU standard (kW)* 151 184 / 200
Max power engine speed (rpm) 6 000 6 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 285 330
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 1 750 1 900
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded
Catalytic converter yes yes
Engine (with replacement of the filter cartridge) 4.25 4.25
(directive 1999/99/EC)
280
Technical data
Petrol weights and towed loads (in kg)

1.2 litre
Engine PureTech 1.2 litre PureTech 110 1.2 litre PureTech 130 S&S
82
Manual Manual Manual EAT6 automatic

Gearbox
(5-speed) (5-speed) (6-speed) (6-speed)
Model code LPHMZ LPHNZ - LRHNZ LPHNY - LRHNY LPHNY - LRHNY

Body style Hatchback Hatchback SW Hatchback SW Hatchback SW
Unladen weight 1 075 1 080 1 190 1 090 1 190 1 150 1 200
Kerb weight* 1 150 1 155 1 265 1 165 1 265 1 225 1 275
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 670 1 720 1 825 1 750 1 840 1 770 1 855
Gross train weight (GTW)

2 395 2 920 2 925 3 041 3 040 2 970 2 955
on a 12 % gradient
Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
750 1 200 1 100 1 300 1 200 1 200 1 100
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient
Unbraked trailer 575 575 630 580 630 610 635
Recommended nose weight 75 75 71 75 71 - -
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
9
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) when towing (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C,
limit the towed load.
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).
281
Technical data
Engine 1.6 litre VTi 115 1.6 litre THP 135** / 150*** / 165***
Model code LWNFP - LXNFP L35GL / L35GX / L35GY - L45GL / L45GX / L45GY
Unladen weight 1 190 1 260 1 255 1 315
Kerb weight* 1 265 1 335 1 330 1 390
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 720 1 820 1 780 1 870

2 320 2 420 2 380 2 470
on a 12 % gradient
600 600 600 600
Unbraked trailer 600 600 600 600
Recommended nose weight 75 71 75 71
** For Russia.
*** Outside Europe.
282
Technical data
Petrol GT and GTi weights and towed loads (in kg)

1.6 litre THP 205 S&S 1.6 litre THP 250 / 270 S&S
Engine
GT GTi
Gearbox Manual (6-speed) Manual (6-speed)
Model code L35GT - L45GT L35GP / L35GN
Body style Hatchback SW Hatchback
Unladen weight 1 200 1 315 1 205

Kerb weight* 1 275 1 390 1 280
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 790 1 880 1 790

3 190 3 180 -
on a 12 % gradient
1 400 1 300 -
Unbraked trailer 635 695 -
Recommended nose weight 75 71 -
9
283
Technical data
Diesel engines and gearboxes

Engine 1.6 litre HDi 92 1.6 litre e-HDi 115 1.6 litre BlueHDi 100
Gearbox Manual (5-speed) Manual (6-speed) Manual (5-speed)
Model code LB9HP - LC9HP LB9HC - LC9HC LBBHY - LCBHY
Body style Hatchback SW Hatchback SW Hatchback SW
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 560
Bore x stroke (mm) 75 x 88.3
Max power: EU standard (kW)* 68 85 73
Max power engine speed (rpm) 4 000 3 600 3 750
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 230 270 254
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 1 750
Fuel Diesel
Catalytic converter yes
Particle filter yes
Engine (with replacement of the filter cartridge) 3.75
* The maximum power corresponds to the value type approved on a test bed, under conditions defined by European legislation
(Directive 1999/99/EC).
284
Technical data
Engine 1.6 litre BlueHDi 120
LBBHZ - LBBHX - LCBHZ - LBBHT - LBBHX - LCBHT -

Model code
LCBHX LCBHX
Bore x stroke (mm) 75 x 88.3
Max power: EU standard (kW)* 85** / 88 85
Max power engine speed (rpm) 3 500
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 300
Fuel Diesel
Particle filter yes
9
** For Belgium.
285
Technical data
Model code LHAHX - LJAHX - LJAHR LHAHX - LJAHX
Bore x stroke (mm) 85 x 88
Max power: EU standard (kW)* 110
Fuel Diesel
Particle filter yes
286
Technical data
Diesel GT engines and gearboxes

2.0 litre BlueHDi 180
Engine
GT
Gearbox EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
Model code LHAHT - LHAHW - LJAHT - LJAHW
Body style Hatchback SW
Bore x stroke (mm) 85 x 88
Max power: EU standard (kW)* 133
Fuel Diesel
Particle filter yes
9
287
Technical data
Diesel weights and towed loads (in kg)

Engine 1.6 litre HDi 92 1.6 litre e-HDi 115 1.6 litre BlueHDi 100
Gearbox Manual (5-speed) Manual (6-speed) Manual (5-speed)
Model code LB9HP - LC9HP LB9HC - LC9HC LBBHY - LCBHY
Body style Hatchback SW Hatchback SW Hatchback SW
Unladen weight 1 090 1 180 1 160 1 200 1 160 1 200
Kerb weight* 1 165 1 255 1 237 1 275 1 235 1 275
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 740 1 850 1 780 1 870 1 780 1 880

3 040 3 050 3 180 3 170 3 074 3 080
on a 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (within GTW limit)

1 300 1 200 1 400 1 300 1 300 1 200
on a 10% or 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer 580 620 615 630 615 630
Recommended nose weight 75 71 75 71 75 71
288
Technical data
Model code LBBHZ - LBBHX - LCBHZ - LCBHX LBBHT - LBBHX - LCBHT - LCBHX
Unladen weight 1 185 1 300 1 200 1 310
Kerb weight* 1 260 1 375 1 275 1 385

3 210 3 170 3 120 3 110
on a 12% gradient

1 400 1 300 1 300 1 200
9
289
Technical data
Model code LHAHX - LJAHX - LJAHR LHAHX - LJAHX
Unladen weight 1 290 1 315 1 310 1 420
Kerb weight* 1 365 1 390 1 385 1 495

3 465 3 470 3 398 3 400
on a 12% gradient

1 600 1 500 1 500 1 400
290
Technical data
Diesel GT weights and towed loads (in kg)

2.0 litre BlueHDi 180
Engine
GT
Gearbox EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
Model code LHAHT - LHAHW - LJAHT - LJAHW
Body style Hatchback SW
Unladen weight 1 320 1 425
Kerb weight* 1 395 1 500
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 920 2 020

3 420 3 420
on a 12% gradient

1 500 1 400
Unbraked trailer 695 750
Recommended nose weight 75 71
9
291
Technical data
Dimensions (in mm)

These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle.
Hatchback SW
292
Technical data
GT / GTi hatchback* SW GT
9
293
Technical data
Affaire version
Number of seats: 2 persons.
Useable boot volume: 1.31 m3
In metres (m)
Load floor length 1.458
Load width at the wheel arches 1.036
Load width at the centre 1.077
Load height
- at the centre 0.916
- at the load aperture 0.831
- below the luggage cover 0.5
294
Technical data
Identification markings
Various visible markings for the identification of your vehicle.
D. Tyre/paint label.
This label on the middle door pillar, driver's
side, contains the following information:
- the tyre inflation pressures, laden and
unladen,
- the tyre sizes (including the tyre load
index and speed rating),
- the inflation pressure for the spare
wheel,
- the paint colour code.
A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) C. Manufacturer's label.

The tyre pressures must be checked
under the bonnet. This self-destroying label on the middle
door pillar, right or left hand side, contains when the tyres are cold, at least once
This number is engraved on the chassis
the following information: a month.
near the right hand front wheel arch.
- the manufacturer's name,
- the European whole vehicle type
approval number, If the tyre pressures are too low, this
9
B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) on - the vehicle identification number (VIN), increases fuel consumption.
- the maximum authorised weight (gross
the windscreen lower cross member.
vehicle weight),
This number is indicated on a self-
- the maximum authorised weight with
adhesive label which is visible through the trailer (gross train weight),
windscreen. - the maximum front axle weight,
- the maximum rear axle weight.
295
Audio and Telematics
Emergency or assistance call

Peugeot Connect SOS
In an emergency, press this
If an impact is detected by the airbag
button for more than 2 seconds.
control unit, and independently of
Flashing of the green LED and
the deployment of any airbags, an
a voice message confirm that
emergency call is made automatically.
the call has been made to the
"Peugeot Connect SOS" call
centre*.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels If you benefit from the Peugeot Connect
the request. Packs offer with the SOS and assistance
The green LED goes off. pack included, there are additional services
Pressing this button for more than 8 seconds available to you in your MyPeugeot
cancels the request at any time. personal space, via the PEUGEOT Internet
website in your country, accessible on
The green LED remains on (without flashing) www.peugeot.co.uk.
when communication is established.
It goes off at the end of the call.
* Subject to the general conditions for the
"Peugeot Connect SOS" immediately locates service available from dealers and to
your vehicle, starts communication with you in technological and technical limitations.
your language**, and where necessary sends
the appropriate public emergency services**. In
countries where the service is not available, or ** Depending on the geographical cover of
when the locating service has been expressly "Peugeot Connect SOS", "Peugeot
declined, the call sent directly to the emergency Connect Assistance" and the official national
services (112) without the vehicle location. language selected by the owner of the vehicle.
The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT
CONNECT services is available from dealers
or at www.peugeot.co.uk.
296
Peugeot Connect Assistance

Operation of the system Press this button for more than
2 seconds to request assistance
When the ignition is switched if the vehicle breaks down. If you purchased your vehicle outside
on, the green LED comes on for A voice message confirms that the PEUGEOT dealer network, we
3 seconds indicating that the the call has been made**. invite you to have a dealer check the
system is operating correctly.
configuration of these services and, if
Pressing this button again immediately cancels desired, modified to suit your wishes.
the request. In a multi-lingual country, configuration
If the orange LED flashes then The cancellation is confirmed by a voice is possible in the official national
goes off: there is a system fault. message. language of your choice.
The orange LED is on continuously: the backup

battery must be replaced.
In either case, the emergency and assistance For technical reasons and in particular
calls may not function. to improve the quality of "PEUGEOT
Contact a qualified repairer as soon as CONNECT services" services to
possible. customers, the manufacturer reserves
the right to carry out updates to the
vehicle's on-board telematic system.
A fault with the system does not
prevent the vehicle being driven.
** Depending on the geographical cover of
"Peugeot Connect SOS", "Peugeot
Connect Assistance" and the official national
language selected by the owner of the vehicle.
.
The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT
CONNECT services is available from dealers
or at www.peugeot.co.uk.
297
DENON equipment
The new DENON Hi-Fi system in the
PEUGEOT 308 is a tailored technological
solution comprising 9 speakers and a digital
amplifier.
The DENON technology offers efficient

components providing high performance:
- 4 flexible membrane tweeters with
resonance chamber to minimise audio
distortion. 100% active at the front of the
vehicle.
- 4 CosConeTM woofers: a technology
allowing a high level of sensitivity and
speaker cone travel, generating high bass
performance despite a very flat form.
- 1 sub-woofer with a 100W speaker
installed under the boot floor, without
affecting the load volume of the boot.
- 1 Class-D 8-way digital amplifier. Improved
control of running noises.
2 audio distribution settings available to
suit the number of occupants in the vehicle
(driver or passengers).
- "Digital Coloration" technology giving the
engine a more sporty and refined sound.
298
7-inch touch screen

GPS satellite navigation - Multimedia audio - Bluetooth® telephone
Contents
First steps 300
Steering mounted controls 303
Menus 304
Media 306
Radio 312
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 314
Music 316
Navigation 320
Navigation - Guidance 328
Traffic 332
Configuration 334
Connected services 344
PEUGEOT Connect Apps 345
Telephone 346
Frequently asked questions 354
The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in As a safety measure, the driver should only carry out operations
your vehicle. which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.
The display of the energy economy mode message signals
.
that the system is about to go into standby. Refer to the Energy
economy (mode) section.
299
First steps
Use the buttons on either side of the touch
In very hot conditions, the system may
screen for access to the menus, then press the
go into stand-by (screen and sound
virtual buttons in the touch screen.
completely off) for a minimum period of
Each menu is displayed in one or two pages
5 minutes.
(primary page and secondary page).
Primary page Secondary page
300
Shortcuts: using virtual buttons in the top

The screen is of the "resistive" type, it
band of the touch screen, it is possible to go
is necessary to press firmly, particularly
directly to the choice of audio source, the list of
for "flick" gestures (scrolling through a
stations (or titles depending on the source) or
list, moving the map ...). A simple wipe
to temperature adjustment.
will not be enough. Pressing with more
than one finger is not recognised.
The screen can be used when wearing
gloves. This technology allows use at
all temperatures.
With the engine running, press to

mute the sound.
With the ignition off, press to switch
the system on.
Selecting the audio source (depending on To clean the screen, use a soft
version): non-abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth)
- "FM" / "AM" / "DAB"* radio wavebands. Volume adjustment (each source without any additional product.
- "USB" memory stick. is independent, including Traffic Do not use pointed objects on the
- CD player (located in the glove box)*. announcements (TA) and navigation screen.
- Telephone connected by Bluetooth* and by instructions). Do not touch the screen with wet
Bluetooth* audio streaming. hands.
- Media player connected to the auxiliary
socket (jack, cable not supplied).
In very hot conditions, the volume may

be limited to protect the system. The
.
return to normal takes place when
the temperature in the passenger
compartment drops.
* Depending on equipment.
301
Steering mounted controls
Press: mute on / off. Radio, rotate: automatic search for Telephone: start or answer a call.
the previous / next station. Call in progress: telephone menu
Radio, press: preset stations. (end call, secret mode, hands-free
Media, rotate: previous / next track. mode).
Increase volume.
Press: confirm a selection. Telephone, press and hold: reject an
incoming call, end a call in progress;
other than call in progress, telephone
Decrease volume. menu.
Radio: display the list of stations.
Media: display the list of tracks.
.
Change audio source: radio, media. Radio, press and hold: update the list
of stations received.
303
Menus
Air conditioning Driving assistance Media
Control of the settings for temperature and air Access to the trip computer. Select an audio source, a radio station, display
flow. Activate, deactivate, adjust settings for certain photographs.
vehicle functions.
Navigation
(Depending on equipment)
Enter navigation settings and choose a

destination.
304
Configuration Connected services Telephone

(Depending on equipment)
Adjust settings for audio (balance, ambience, ...), PEUGEOT CONNECT APPS Connect a telephone by Bluetooth ®.
colour scheme, brightness of the instruments and Connect to an applications portal to facilitate,
controls, display (language, units, date, time, ...) make safe and personalise journeys by means
and access the interactive help for the vehicle's of a connection key available on subscription
main systems and warning lamps. from a PEUGEOT dealer.
.
305
Media
Level 1 Level 2
"Media" List of FM stations

Primary page
Preset
306
Level 1 Level 2 Comments
Media
List of FM stations Press on a radio station to select it.
List
FM Radio
DAB Radio
AM Radio
Media CD
Select change of source
Source USB
iPod
Bluetooth
AUX
Media
Press an empty location to Preset it.
Preset
.
307
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
"Media"
List of FM stations
Secondary page
Media
Photos
308
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Comments

Preset Press a radio station to select it.
Media
Update list Update the list of stations received.
Secondary page
Frequency Enter the desired radio frequency.
Radio list
Confirm Save the settings.
Page selection Display the selected photo full screen.
Rotate Rotate the photo 90°.
Media Select all the photos in the list.

Select all
Press again to deselect.
Secondary page
Previous photo.
Photos
Slideshow Pause / Play. Display the photos in sequence, full screen.
Next photo.
.
309
"Media"
Secondary page
Media
Settings
Settings
Settings
310
Media
Secondary page Presentation of the last media used.
Media list
Random (all tracks):
Media
Random (current album):
Choose the play settings.
Settings
Loop:
Aux. amplification
RDS options
Media DAB/FM options
Radio
Activate or deactivate the options.
Secondary page Display Radio Text
Settings
Settings DAB radio thumbnails
Traffic announcements (TA)
Announcements Weather
Activate or deactivate the options.
Varied - Sport
Settings
.
Alert settings
311
Radio
Selecting a station Changing a radio frequency
Press on Media to display the Press on Media to display the
OR
primary page. primary page.
Press Media to display the primary
page then select "Preset".
or
Press on Media to display the
primary page then go to the
secondary page. By automatic frequency search
Select a preset radio station
in the list.
If necessary, select change of Press 3 or 4 to move the cursor for an

source. automatic search down or up for a radio
Select "List" in the primary page.
frequency.
Select "FM Radio" or "AM Radio".

or
OR
Select "Radio list" in the secondary
page. Press on Media to display the
primary page then press on the
secondary page.
Select a radio station from

The exterior environment (hills, buildings,
the list offered.
tunnel, car park, below ground...) may
prevent reception, even in RDS station
tracking mode. This phenomenon is Press on "Enter frequency" to
normal in the propagation of radio waves display the primary page then press
Select "Update list" to refresh and is in no way indicative of a fault with on the secondary page.
the list. the audio system.
312
Preset a station Activate/ Deactivate RDS

THEN Select a radio station or frequency Press on Media to display the
(refer to the corresponding section). primary page then go to the
Select change source. secondary page.
Press on "Preset".
Select "FM Radio" or "AM Radio".

Select "Settings".
Select a number in the list to preset the
previously chosen radio station.
A long press on a number presets (memorises) Select "Radio".
the station.
OR Or Activate/deactivate
"RDS options".
Enter the frequency in full A press on this button presets all of
(e.g.: 92.10 MHz) using the keypad the stations one after the other.
then "Confirm". RDS, if activated, allows you to continue
listening to the same station by automatic
Recall pre-set stations retuning to alternative frequencies.
However, in certain conditions, coverage
Press on Media to display the of an RDS station may not be assured
By alphabetical list primary page then select "Save". throughout the entire country as radio
stations do not cover 100 % of the
Press the current radio band then choose the
territory. This explains the loss of
radio station from the list offered.
.
reception of the station during a journey.
313
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio

Short-cut: access to the choice of audio source,
Display of the name of the the list of stations (or titles depending on the
current station. source) or temperature adjustment. Select the radio station.
Select the audio source.

Any thumbnail broadcast by
Display the "DAB" band.
the station.
Display of "Radiotext" for

Secondary page. the current station.
Next "Multiplex".
Next radio station.
Previous "Multiplex".
Previous radio station.
Preset stations, buttons 1
to 15.
Display the name and Short press: select the
number of the multiplex preset radio station.
service being used. Long press: preset a radio
station.
Display of options:
If the "DAB" radio station being listened to is not
if active but not available, the display will be greyed out,
available on "FM", the "DAB FM" option is greyed out.
if active and available, the display will be blank.
Journaline ® is a text-based information service designed for digital radio systems.
It provides text-based information structured around topics and sub-topics.
This service is available from the "LIST OF DAB STATIONS" page.
314
DAB Digital radio - DAB / FM

(Digital Audio Broadcasting) auto tracking
Digital radio
Digital radio provides higher quality "DAB" does not cover 100% of the If "DAB / FM auto tracking" is activated,
reception and also the graphical display territory. there is a difference of a few seconds
of current information on the radio When the digital radio signal is weak, when the system switches to "FM"
station being listened to. Select "List" in "DAB / FM auto tracking" allows you to analogue radio with sometimes a
the primary page. continue listening to the same station, variation in volume.
The range of multiplexes available is by automatically switching to the When the digital signal is restored, the
displayed in alphabetical order. corresponding "FM" analogue station system automatically changes back to
(if there is one). "DAB".
Press on Media to display the Press Media to display the primary

primary page. page then press on the secondary If the "DAB" station being listened to
page. is not available on "FM" ("DAB/FM"
Select change of source. option greyed out), or "DAB / FM auto
tracking" is not activated, the sound
will cut out while the digital signal is too
Select "DAB Radio". weak.
Select "Settings".
Select "List" in the primary page.

Select "RADIO".
or
Select "Radio list" in the secondary
.
page. Select "Digital/FM auto
tracking" then "Confirm".
Select the radio station from the list offered.
315
Music
USB player Auxiliary socket (AUX) Selection of source
Press on Media to display the
primary page.
Select change of source.
Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port Connect the portable device (MP3 player…) to
or connect the USB device to the USB port the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable
using a suitable cable (not supplied). (not supplied).
The system builds playlists (in temporary First adjust the volume of your portable device
memory), an operation which can take from (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your
a few seconds to several minutes at the first audio system. Choose the source.
connection. Display and management of the controls are
Reduce the number of non-music files and the via the portable device.
The steering mounted SRC (source)
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
button can be used to go to the next
The playlists are updated every time the
media source, available if the source
ignition is switched off or connection of a USB
memory stick. The lists are memorised: if they
CD player is active.
Insert the CD in the player.
are not modified, the subsequent loading time Press OK to confirm the selection.
will be shorter.
316
Information and advice

The audio equipment will only play audio In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or Use only USB memory sticks formatted
files with ".wma, .aac, .flac, .ogg and. mp3" CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select FAT 32 (file allocation table).
file extensions and with a bit rate of between the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard.
32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. If the disc is recorded in another format it may
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. not be played correctly. The system does not support the
No other type of file (.mp4, ...) can be played. It is recommended that the same recording simultaneous connection of two
".wma" files must be of the standard standard is always used for an individual disc, identical devices (two memory sticks,
wma 9 type. with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) two Apple ® players) but it is possible
The sampling rates supported are 32, 44 and for optimum sound quality. to connect one memory stick and one
48 KHz. In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Apple ® player at the same time.
Joliet standard is recommended.
It is advisable to restrict file names to It is recommended that the USB cable

20 characters, without using of special for the portable device is used.
characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing The system supports USB mass
and displaying problems. storage devices, BlackBerry ® devices
or Apple ® players via USB ports. The
adaptor cable not supplied.
Control of the peripheral device is with
the audio system controls.
Other peripherals, not recognised on
connection, must be connected to the
auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not
supplied).
.
317
Bluetooth® audio streaming Connecting Apple® players

Streaming allows audio files on your telephone
The classifications available are those
to be played through the vehicle's speakers.
of the portable device connected
(artists / albums / genres / playlists /
Connect the telephone: see the "Telephone" audiobooks / podcasts).
section, then "Bluetooth". The default classification used is by
Choose the "Audio" or "All" profile. artist. To modify the classification used,
return to the first level of the menu
If play does not start automatically, it may be then select the desired classification
necessary to start the audio playback from the (playlists for example) and confirm
Connect the Apple ® player to the USB port to go down through the menu to the
telephone. using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Control is from the peripheral device or by desired track.
Play starts automatically.
using the audio system buttons.
Control is via the audio system.

The version of software in the audio system
may not be compatible with the generation of
Once connected in streaming mode,
your Apple ® player.
the telephone is considered to be a
media source.
It is recommended that you activate
"Repeat" on the Bluetooth peripheral.
318
Navigation
Navigation Route settings
"Navigation"
Primary page
320

Enter destination Display recent destinations.
Fastest
Shortest
Time/distance
Choose the navigation criteria.
Ecological The map displays the route chosen according to
these criteria.
Calculatory criteria Tolls
Ferries
Navigation
Strict - Close
Settings
Show route on map Display the map and start navigation.
Navigation
Confirm Save the options.
Save Save the current address.
Stop navigation Delete the navigation information.
Choose the volume for voice and announcement

Voice
of street names.
Detour from your initial route by a certain

Diversion
distance.
Display in text mode.
Zoom in.
Zoom out.
Navigation
Display in full screen mode.
.
Use the arrows to move the map.
Switch to 2D map.
321
Enter destination Address

"Navigation"
Secondary page
For managing contacts and

their addresses, refer to the
Navigation "Telephone" section.
Contacts
To use the telephone functions,

refer to the "Telephone" section.
322

Curr. location
Points of Interest Address settings
Town centre
Address
Save Save the current address.
Add waypoint Add a waypoint to the route.
Navigate to Press to calculate the route.
Addresses
Navigation
Add contact
Secondary page
Contacts Add waypoint Select a contact then calculate the route.
Enter destination
Search for contact
Navigate to
From map Display the map and zoom to view the roads.
Create, add or delete a waypoint or view the

Itinerary
itinerary.
Stop Delete navigation information.
Navigate to Press to calculate the route.
.
323
"Navigation"
Secondary page
Navigation Search for a point of interest Search for a POI by name
Point of interest displayed on the map
324

All POIs
Garage
Navigation List of categories available.
Dining/hotels After choosing the category, select the points of
Secondary page interest.
Personal
Search for POI
By name
Search Save the settings.
Select all
Navigation
Delete Choose the display settings for POIs.
Secondary page
Import POIs
Show POIs
.
325
Diversion
"Navigation"
Traffic messages
Secondary page
Map settings
Map settings
Navigation
Settings
Settings
Moving
between
Settings
the two
menus.
326

On the route
Around vehicle
Navigation
Settings for the choice of messages and
Near destination
Secondary page the filter radius.
Detour over a distance
Traffic messages Detour
Recalculate route
Finish Save the options.
Flat view north heading
Orientation Flat view vehicle heading
Perspective view
Navigation
Choose the display and orientation of
Maps
Secondary page the map.
"Day" map colour
Map settings
Aspect "Night" map colour
Automatic day/night
Route settings
Navigation Voice Enter settings and choose the volume for the
Secondary page Alert! voice and announcement of street names.
.
Settings Traffic options

327
Navigation - Guidance
Choosing a new destination
Towards a new destination
Press on Navigation to display the Select "Save" to save the address To delete navigation information,
primary page. entered as a contact entry. press "Settings".
The system allows up to 200 entries.
Press on the secondary page. Press "Stop navigation".
Select "Navigate to".

Select "Enter destination".
To resume navigation press
"Settings".
Choose the navigation criteria:
Select "Address". "Fastest" or "Shortest" or "Time/ Press "Resume navigation".
distance" or "Ecological".
Select the "Country:" from Choose the restriction criteria:

the list offered, then in the "Include tollroads", "Include
same way the "City:" or ferries", "Traffic", "Strict", "Close".
its post code, the "Road:",
the "N°:". Select "Confirm".
Confirm each time.
Or
Press "Show route on map" to start
navigation.
328
Towards a recent destination Towards a contact
Press on Navigation to display the Select a destination from

To be able to use navigation "towards
primary page. the contacts in the list
a contact in the directory", it is first
offered.
necessary to enter the address for your
Press on the secondary page. contact.
Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Select the criteria then "Confirm" to
Press on the secondary page. start navigation.
Select an address from

the list offered.
Select "Navigate to". Select "Contacts".
Select the criteria then "Confirm" or

press "Show route on map" to start
navigation.
.
329
Towards GPS coordinates Towards a point on the map Towards points of interest (POI)
Press on Navigation to display the Press on Navigation to display the Points of Interest (POI) are listed in different
primary page. primary page. categories.
Press on the secondary page. Press on the secondary page. Press on Navigation to display the
primary page.
Select "Enter destination". Select "Enter destination". Press on the secondary page.
Select "Address". Select "From map". Select "Search for POI".
Enter the "Longitude:" Zooming in on the map shows points with Select "All POIs"
then the "Latitude:". information.
A long press on a point opens its content.

Or
"Garage",
Select the criteria then "Confirm" or

press "Show route on map" to start Or
navigation. "Dining/hotels".
330
An annual mapping update allows new

points of interest to be presented to you.
You can also update the Risk areas /
Danger areas every month.
The detailed procedure is available on:
http://peugeot.navigation.com.
.
331
Traffic
Hazard zone / Danger zone Traffic information
alert settings Display of messages
Press on Navigation to display the
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
This series of alerts and displays is
primary page.
only available if Risk Areas have first
been downloaded and installed on the Press on the secondary page.
Press on the secondary page. system.
Select "Traffic messages".

Select "Settings".
Choose filter settings for:

Select "Alarm!".
"On the route",
It is then possible to activate Risk Areas alerts

then: "Around",
- "Audible warning"
- "Alert only when navigating"
- "Alert only for overspeed" "Near destination", filters to fine-
- "Display speed limits" tune the list of messages.
- Timing: the choice of timing allows the
time before giving a Risk Area alert to be
Press again to remove the filter.
defined.
Select "Confirm".
332
Setting filters Receiving TA messages

Select the message from Press on Navigation to display the Press on Navigation to display the
the list offered. primary page. primary page.
Press on the secondary page. Press on the secondary page.

Select the magnifying glasses to
have voice information.
Select "Settings". Select "Settings".
TMC (Traffic Message Channel) Select "Info options". Select "Voice".

messages on GPS-Navigation contain
traffic information transmitted in real
time.
Select: Activate / Deactivate "Traffic
- "Warn of new messages", (TA)".
- "Speak messages".
Then enter the filter radius. The TA (Traffic Announcement)
function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function
Select "Confirm".
needs good reception of a radio station
transmitting this type of message.
When a traffic report is transmitted,
the current audio source is interrupted
We recommend a filter radius of: automatically to play the TA message.
.
- 12 miles (20 km) in urban areas, Normal playback of the audio source
- 30 miles (50 km) on motorways. resumes at the end of the transmission
of the message.
333
Configuration
Audio settings
"Configuration" Audio settings
Primary page
Audio settings
Choice of colors
334

Ambience Choose the sound ambience.
Set the position of the sound in the vehicle using
Balance
the Arkamys ® system.
Choose the volume or activate the link to vehicle
Configuration Sound effects
speed.
Audio settings Ringtones Choose the telephone ringtone and volume.
Choose the volume for the voice and
Voice
announcement of street names.
Configuration
Turns off the display (black screen). Pressing the
black screen restores the display.
Turn off screen
Configuration
Confirm After choosing the color scheme, save the setting.
Color schemes
Go back
Driving assistance -
Equipment
Configuration Warning lamps

Consult the Interactive help.
Audio Communication
Interactive help
Navigation GPS
.
Previous page
Next page
335
Level 1 Level 2
"Configuration" Units
Secondary page
Factory settings
Configuration Adjust date and time
Display screen
336

Set the units used to display distance, fuel
Units
consumption and temperature.
Configuration Select the desired data in the list then
Delete data
press Delete.
Secondary page
Factory settings Return to factory settings.
System Settings
Configuration
Secondary page Confirm Set the date and time then confirm.
Time/Date
Automatic text scrolling

Configuration
Secondary page Deactivate animations Make the setting then confirm.
Screen settings
Confirm
.
337
Level 1 Level 2
"Configuration" Choice of language
Secondary page
Configuration Calculator
Calendar
338
Configuration
Secondary page Confirm Select the language then confirm.
Languages
Configuration
Secondary page Select the calculator.
Calculator
Configuration
Secondary page Select the calendar.
Calendar
.
339
Audio settings
Press on Configuration to display
The distribution (or spatialisation using On-board audio: Arkamys © Sound
the primary page.
the Arkamys © system) of sound is an Staging optimises sound distribution in
audio process that allows the audio the the passenger compartment.
Select "Audio settings". quality to be adapted to the number of
listeners in the vehicle.
Available only with the 6-speaker
Select "Ambience" or "Balance" or configuration.
"Sound effects" or "Ringtones" or
"Voice".
The audio settings (Ambience, Bass,
Treble and Loudness) are different
and independent for each sound
source.
The settings for distribution and
balance are common to all sources.
- "Ambience" (choice of 6 musical

ambiences)
- "Bass"
- "Treble"
- "Loudness" (Activate/Deactivate)
- "Balance" ("Driver", "All
passengers", "Front only")
- "Audio setting on touch screen"
- "Volume linked to vehicle
speed:" (Activate/Deactivate)
340
Color schemes Interactive help

Press on Configuration to display Press on Configuration to display
the primary page. the primary page.
Select "Color schemes". Select "Interactive help".
Select the colour scheme in the list

then "Confirm". The Interactive help included in
the system is not intended to be a
substitute for the more complete
content of the printed handbook.
At each change of colour scheme
the system restarts, showing a black
screen for a few moments.
As a safety measure, consultation of

the handbook is only possible with the
vehicle stationary.
For safety reasons, the procedure for
changing the colour scheme is only
possible with the vehicle stationary.
.
341
System
Modify system settings
Press on Configuration to display Press on Configuration to display Press on Configuration to display
the primary page then go to the the primary page then go to the the primary page then go to the
secondary page. secondary page. secondary page.
Select "System Settings".

Select "Screen settings". Select:
- "Time/Date" to change the time
zone, synchronisation with GPS,
Select "Units" to change the units time and its format and then the
Activate or deactivate "Activate date.
of distance, fuel consumption and
automatic text scrolling" and - "Languages" to change the
temperature.
"Activate animations". language.
Select "Delete data" to delete the - "Calculator" to display a
list of recent destinations, personal calculator.
points of interest, contacts in the list. - "Calendar" to display a calendar.
Choose the item then select "Delete".
Select "Factory settings" to return

to the original settings.
342
Connected services
Level 1 Level 2
"Connected services" Identification
Primary page Secondary page

Driving assistance Internet navigation via Bluetooth
applications, see the telephone Dial-Up Networking
"PEUGEOT Connect Apps"* (DUN).
section.
DUN connection settings
Certain new generation
smartphones are not compatible
with this standard.
Transfer rate
* Depending on country.
344
PEUGEOT Connect Apps

Press the "Connected services" The "MyPeugeot" application is a link between
"PEUGEOT Connect Apps"* is
menu to display the applications. the user, the manufacturer and its dealer network.
a service providing driving aid
It allows the customer to know everything about
applications in real time; it gives access
their vehicle: servicing plan, accessory range,
to useful information such as the state
service contracts taken out, ...
of the traffic, danger zones, fuel prices,
It also makes possible the sending of the vehicle's
the availability of parking places, tourist
mileage to the "MyPeugeot" site, or to identify
sites, weather conditions, correct
a dealer.
addresses…
It includes access to the mobile
network associated with the use
of these applications. "PEUGEOT
Connect Apps"* is a service available
under subscription contract from
PEUGEOT dealers, depending on
country and the type of touch screen,
both before and after delivery of a new These applications use vehicle data such as
vehicle. the current speed, mileage, remaining fuel
range or even GPS position to provide pertinent
information.
Plug the "PEUGEOT Connect

Apps" connection key into the
USB port.
* Depending on country.
As a safety measure, some functions can only
be used when stationary. .
345
Telephone
"Telephone"
Primary page
Call log
Contacts
346

All calls
Incoming calls
Outgoing calls
Telephone
Contacts After making choices, start the call.
Call log
View
Magnifying glass
Create
Call
Addresses
New
Import
Delete
View
Telephone Delete all
After making choices, start the call.
Contacts Search for contact
Confirm
Navigate to
Search for contact
Call
.
347
"Telephone" Bluetooth (equipment)
Secondary page
Tele phone connection Devices detected
Telephone Options
348

Start the search for another peripheral device to
Search
connect.
Telephone
connection Stop the Bluetooth connection to the selected
Disconnect
peripheral device.
Secondary page Import the contacts from the selected telephone
Update
to store them in the audio system.
Bluetooth
Connection Delete Delete the selected telephone.
Telephone
Telephone
connection
Secondary page Devices detected Audio streaming Start the search for peripheral devices.
Search
Internet
for devices
Cut the microphone temporarily so that the

Put on hold contact cannot hear your conversation with a
passenger.
Telephone Import the contacts from the selected telephone
Update
connection to save then in the audio system.
Secondary page Ringtones Choose the telephone ringtone and volume.
Telephone Options Contact records used and free, percentage of

Memory info. storage space used by internal contacts and
.
Bluetooth contacts.
349
Pairing a Bluetooth®
telephone
For reasons of safety and because they
Procedure from the system
require prolonged attention on the part Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function Select the name of the
of the driver, the operations for pairing and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone desired peripheral from the
the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the configuration). list and "Confirm".
hands-free system of the audio system
must be carried out with the vehicle Press on Telephone to display the
stationary. primary page. Enter a code of at least 4 figures for
the connection then "Confirm".
Procedure (short) from the Press on the secondary page.

telephone Enter this same code in the telephone then
In the Bluetooth menu of your device, select the accept the connection.
system name in the list of devices detected.
Select "Bluetooth connection".
The system offers to connect the telephone:
- in "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
Enter a code of at least 4 figures in the device
only),
and confirm.
Select Search. - in "Audio streaming" (streaming: wireless
The list of telephones detected is playing of audio files from the telephone),
Enter this same code in the system,
displayed. - in "Internet" (internet browsing, only if your
select "OK" and confirm.
telephone is compatible with the "DUN"
Dial-Up Networking Bluetooth standard).
If the telephone is not detected, it is Select one or more profiles and confirm.
recommended that you switch the Bluetooth
function on your telephone off and then on again.
350
Connecting a Bluetooth®
peripheral device
Automatic reconnection
On switching on the ignition, the telephone
The services available depend on Depending on the type of telephone, connected when the ignition was last switched
the network, the SIM card and the the system will ask you to accept or not off is automatically reconnected, if this
compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone the transfer of your contacts. connection mode had been activated during the
used. Check the telephone manual and If not, select "Update". pairing procedure.
with your network provider for details of
The connection is confirmed by the display of a
the services available to you.
message and the name of the telephone.
Manual connection
On return to the vehicle, if the last telephone
The ability of the system to connect Press on Telephone to display the
connected is present again, it is reconnected
with only one profile depends on the primary page.
automatically and within around 30 seconds
telephone. The three profiles may all
after switching on the ignition the pairing is
connect by default. Press on the secondary page.
done without any action on your part, with
(Bluetooth activated).
Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information To modify the automatic connection mode,
(compatibility, additional help, ...). select the telephone in the list then select the Select "Bluetooth" to display the list
desired profile. of paired peripherals.
The recognised telephone
appears in the list. Select the peripheral to connect.
Press on "Search".
.
Depending on your telephone, you may be
asked to accept automatic connection every
The connection is confirmed by the display of a
time the ignition is switched on.
message and the name of the telephone.
351
Managing paired Receiving a call Making a call

telephones
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a
This function allows the connection or Using the telephone is not
superimposed display in the screen.
disconnection of a peripheral device as recommended while driving.
well as the deletion of a pairing. Make a short press on the steering Park the vehicle.
mounted TEL button to accept an Make the call using the steering
Press on Telephone to display the incoming call. mounted controls.
primary page.
Make a long press Calling a new number
Press on the secondary page.
Press on Telephone to display the
on the steering mounted TEL button primary page.
Select "Bluetooth" to display the list to reject the call.
of paired peripheral devices. Enter the phone number using the
digital keypad.
Or
Select the peripheral in the list. Press "Call" to start the call.
Select "Search for devices " Select "End call".
Calling a contact
Or
primary page.
"Connect / Disconnect" to start or
end the Bluetooth connection with
the selected device. Or make a long press
Or
"Delete" to delete the pairing. on the steering mounted TEL button.
352
Managing contacts / entries
Select "Contacts". Press on Telephone to display the Select "Directory information" for the
primary page. number of entries used, available, ...
Select the desired contact from the list offered. Select "Contacts".
Select "Call".
Select "Add contact".
Calling a recently used number

Select "Create" to add a new contact.

primary page.
Or
"Modify" to edit the selected contact.
Select "Call log".
Or
Select the desired contact from the list offered. "Delete" to delete the selected
contact.
It is always possible to make a call
directly from the telephone; park the
Or
vehicle first as a safety measure.
"Delete all" to delete all information
.
for the selected contact.
353
Frequently asked questions

The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.
Navigation
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The route calculation is not The route settings may conflict with the current location (exclusion of Check the route settings in the "Navigation"
successful. toll roads on a toll motorway). menu.
The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The Hazard zone audible The audible warning is not active. Activate audible warnings in the "Navigation"
warning does not work. menu.
The system does not The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages. Select the "Traffic info" function in the list of route
suggest a detour around an settings.
incident on the route.
I receive an Accident-prone Other than guidance, the system announces all Hazard zones Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of the
area alert which is not on positioned in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an Accident-prone area. Select "On the route" to no
my route. alert for a Hazard zone located on nearby or parallel roads. longer receive alerts other than navigation instructions
or to reduce the time for the announcement.
354

Certain traffic jams along On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive Wait until the traffic information is being received
the route are not indicated the traffic information. correctly (display of the traffic information icons
in real time. on the map).
The filters are too restrictive. Modify the "Geographic filter" settings.
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for This phenomenon is normal. The system is
the traffic information. dependent on the traffic information available.
The altitude is not On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to Wait until the system has started up completely so
displayed. receive more than 4 satellites correctly. that there is GPS coverage by at least 4 satellites.
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the This phenomenon is normal. The system
weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary. is dependent on the GPS signal reception
conditions.
.
355
Radio
The quality of reception of The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
the radio station listened listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area short-cut menu to enable the system to check
to gradually deteriorates through which the vehicle is travelling. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
or the stored stations do the geographical area.
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...). The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
block reception, including in RDS mode. a fault with the audio system.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
I cannot find some radio The station is not received or its name has changed in the list. Press and hold the "List" button at the steering
stations in the list of mounted controls to update the list of stations
stations received. received or press on the system update function:
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name "Update list".
(the title of the song for example).
The name of the radio The system interprets this information as the name of the station.
station changes.
356
Media
Playback of my USB Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
memory stick starts only access to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
after a very long wait catalogue time). structure on the memory stick.
(around 2 to 3 minutes).
When I connect my iPhone When the iPhone connects automatically as a telephone, it forces Disconnect and reconnect to the USB port
as a telephone and to the the streaming function. The streaming function takes the place of (the USB function takes priority over streaming).
USB port at the same time, the USB function which is then not useable, there is a period without
I am unable to play the sound of the track being played with Apple ® players.
music files.
The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any - Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
automatically or is not audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. right way up.
played by the player. - Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
The CD has been recorded in a format that is not compatible with be played if it is too damaged.
the player (udf, ...). - Check the content in the case of a recorded
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is CD: refer to the advice in the "AUDIO" section.
not recognised by the audio system. - The audio system's CD player does not play
DVDs.
- Some recorded CDs will not be played by
the audio system because they are not of the
correct quality.
There is a long waiting When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain This phenomenon is normal.
period following the insertion amount of data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from a few
.
of a CD or connection of a seconds to a few minutes.
USB memory stick.
357

The CD player sound is The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
poor. conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
unsuitable. an ambience.
Some characters in the The audio system does not display some types of characters. Use standard characters to name tracks and
media information are not folders.
displayed correctly while
playing.
Playing of streaming files The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device.
does not start.
The names of tracks and The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.
the track length are not
displayed on the screen
when streaming audio.
358
Settings
In changing the setting The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the balance settings. Modify the balance or equalizer settings to obtain
of treble and bass the Modifying one without the other is not possible. the desired musical ambience.
equalizer setting is
deselected.
In changing the equalizer

setting, treble and bass
return to zero.
When changing the The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings. Modify the balance or distribution settings to
balance settings, the Modifying one without the other is not possible. obtain the desired musical ambience.
distribution setting is
deselected.
When changing an
distribution setting,
the balance setting is
deselected.
.
359

There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings for Volume, Bass, Check that the audio settings for (Volume, Bass,
sound quality between the Treble, Equalizer and Loudness can be adapted to the different Treble, Equalizer, Loudness) are adapted to the
different audio sources. sound sources, which may result in audible differences when sources listened to. It is advisable to set the
changing source. Audio functions (Bass, Treble, Fr-Re balance,
Le-Ri balance) to the middle position, select the
"Linear", musical ambience and set the loudness
correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or
to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
With the engine off, the When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
system switches off after a depends on the state of charge of the battery. charge.
few minutes of use. The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and
switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
360
Telephone
I cannot connect my The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the - Check that your telephone's Bluetooth
Bluetooth telephone. telephone may not be visible. function is switched on.
- Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. You can check the compatibility of your telephone
at www.peugeot.co.uk (services).
The volume of the The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Increase the volume of the audio system, to
telephone connected maximum if required, and increase the volume of
in Bluetooth mode is the telephone if necessary.
inaudible.
The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of telephone Reduce the ambient noise level (close the
communication. windows, reduce the booster fan speed, slow
down, ...).
Some contacts are The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display
duplicated in the list. contacts on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both. telephone contacts".
When both synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be
duplicated.
Contacts are not shown in Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings Modify the display setting in the telephone
alphabetical order. chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order. directory.
.
The system does not receive The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages to
SMS text messages. the system.
361
Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5)

Audio system / Bluetooth®
Contents
First steps 364
Steering mounted controls 365
Menus 366
Radio 366
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 368
Media 370
Telephone 374
Screen menu map(s) 376
Frequently asked questions 379
Your PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5) is coded in such a way As a safety measure, the driver must only carry out operations
that it will only operate in your vehicle. which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the
battery, the audio equipment may switch off after a few minutes.
.
363
First steps
On/off, volume setting. Audio settings: front/rear fader, left/ Automatic frequency search down/up.
right balance, bass/treble, loudness, Select previous/next CD, MP3 or
audio ambiences. USB track.
Display the list of local stations.

Long press: CD tracks or MP3 folders Select the screen display mode:
Select next frequency down/up.
(CD / USB). date, audio functions, telephone,
Select previous/next MP3 folder.
Bluetooth, personalisation-
Select previous/next folder / genre /
configuration.
artist / playlist (USB).
TA (Traffic Announcements) on/off.
Display main menu.
Select wavebands FM, DAB and AM. Confirm.
Buttons 1 to 6:
Select a pre-set radio station.
Select source: Long press: pre-set a station. Abandon the current operation.
Radio; audio CD / MP3 CD; USB;
Jack connection; Streaming; AUX.
364
Steering mounted controls

Radio: select the previous/next Radio: automatic search for a lower
pre-set station. frequency.
USB: select genre / artist / folder CD / MP3 / USB: select the previous
from the classification list. track.
Select the previous/next item in a CD / USB: continuous press: fast
menu. back.
Move in the list.
Radio: automatic search for a higher Volume increase.

frequency.
CD / MP3 / USB: select the next
track.
CD / USB: continuous press: fast Volume decrease.
forward.
Move in the list.
Change audio source. Mute: press the volume increase and

Confirm a selection. decrease buttons simultaneously.
Call/end call on the telephone. The sound is restored by pressing
Press for more than 2 seconds: one of the two volume buttons.
telephone main menu.
.
365
Menus Radio
Screen C Screen A Selecting a station
Press the SRC button repeatedly and
select the radio.
Press the BAND button to select a

Multimedia waveband.
For a detailed global view of the menus
Media parameters, Radio
available, refer to "Screen menu map"
parameters.
section.
Briefly press one of the buttons to
Telephone carry out an automatic search of the
Call, Directory management, radio stations.
Telephone management, Hang up.
Press one of the buttons to carry out

Bluetooth connection
a manual search up / down for radio
Connections management, Search
frequencies.
for a device.
Personalisation-configuration Press the LIST button to display the

Define the vehicle parameters, list of stations received locally
Choice of language, Display (30 stations maximum).
configuration, Choice of units, Date To update this list, press for more
and time adjustment. than two seconds.
366
RDS Receiving TA messages

Select "Activate RDS".
The external environment (hills, The TA (Traffic Announcement)
buildings, tunnels, basement car function gives priority to TA alert
parks, ...) may block reception, messages. To operate, this function
including in RDS mode. This is a Press OK, RDS is displayed in the needs good reception of a radio station
normal effect of the way in which radio screen. transmitting this type of message.
waves are transmitted and does not When a traffic report is transmitted, the
indicate any failure of the audio system. current audio source (Radio, CD, ...)
is interrupted automatically to play the
TA message. Normal playback of the
Press the MENU button. In "Radio" mode, press OK directly to activate / audio source resumes at the end of the
deactivate RDS mode. transmission of the message.
Select "Audio functions".

RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue Press the TA button to activate or
listening to the same station by automatic deactivate traffic messages.
retuning to alternative frequencies.
Press OK. However, in certain conditions, coverage
of an RDS station may not be assured
throughout the country as radio stations
do not cover 100 % of the territory. This
Select the "FM waveband explains the loss of reception of a station
preferences" function. that can occur during a journey.
Press OK.
.
367
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio
Display options: If the "DAB" station being listened to

if active but not available, the display will be is not available on "FM", "DAB FM" is
struck out. struck out.
Display the name of the current

station.
Preset stations, buttons 1 to 6.

Short press: select the preset radio
station.
Long press: preset a radio station.
Display the name of the multiplex

service being used.
Represents the signal strength for the Display of RadioText (TXT) for the
band being listened to. current radio station.
368
Digital radio
Press the "Menu" button.
Digital radio provides a superior audio When the radio station is displayed in
quality and also additional categories of the screen, press on "OK" to display
traffic announcements (TA INFO). the contextual menu.
The different "multiplex services" (Frequency hopping (RDS), DAB / FM
Select "Multimedia" and confirm.
offer a choice of radio stations in auto tracking, RadioText (TXT) display,
alphabetical order. Information on the station, ...)
Select "DAB / FM auto tracking"

and confirm
Change band (FM1, FM2, DAB, ...)
DAB / FM tracking If "DAB / FM auto tracking" is on, there

will be a difference of a few seconds
Change of station within the same in the programme when the system
"multiplex service". "DAB" does not have 100% coverage of changes to analogue "FM" radio, with
the country. sometimes a variation in volume.
When the digital signal is weak, When the strength of the digital signal
Start a search for the next "multiplex "DAB / FM auto tracking" allows you to is good again, the system automatically
service". continue listening to the same station, switches back to "DAB"
by automatically switching to the
corresponding analogue "FM" station
Long press: select the desired (if it exists).
If the "DAB" station you are listening
categories of announcements from to is not available on "FM" ("DAB/FM"
Transport, News, Entertainment and option barred), or if "DAB / FM auto
.
Flash special (availability according tracking" is not on, the sound will be cut
to the station). when the digital signal is too weak.
369
Media
USB player
Press and hold LIST to display the Press one of these buttons to gain
different classifications. access to the previous / next track in
the list.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or back.
Select by "Folder" / "Artist" /
"Genre" / "Playlist".
Press one of these buttons to

Insert a USB memory stick into the USB port Press OK to select the classification gain access to the previous / next
or connect a USB peripheral device to the USB required, then press OK again to "Folder" / "Artist" / "Genre" /
port using a suitable cable (not supplied). confirm. "Playlist" in the list
Press LIST briefly to display the

previously selected classification.
The system creates playlists
(temporary memory), which can take
from a few seconds to several minutes
on the first connection. Navigate through the list using the
Reducing the number of non-music left/right and up/down buttons.
files and the number of folders reduces
this waiting time. Playlists are updated
every time the ignition is switched off or
a USB memory stick is connected. Confirm the selection by
The lists are memorised: if the lists are pressing OK.
not changed, the subsequent loading
time is reduced.
370
Auxiliary socket (AUX) CD player

Insert circular compact discs only. To play a disc which has already
Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs been inserted, press the SOURCE
or CDs copied using a personal recorder, may button several times in succession
cause faults which are no reflection on the and select CD.
quality of the vehicle's player.
Insert a CD in the player, play begins
Press one of the buttons to select a
automatically.
track on the CD.
Connect the portable device (MP3 player, …) to

the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable Press the LIST REFRESH button to
(not supplied). display the list of tracks on the CD.
Press the SOURCE button several

times in succession and select AUX.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or fast back.
First adjust the volume on your portable device
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume on
your audio system. Operation of controls is via
the portable device.
Do not connect a device to both the

Jack auxiliary socket and the USB port
at the same time.
.
371
Playing an MP3 CD Information and advice

compilation
Insert an MP3 compilation in the CD player. To play a disc which has already The audio system will only play files with
The audio equipment searches for all of the been inserted, press the SOURCE the extension ".mp3" with a sampling rate of
music tracks, which may take anything between button several times in succession 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of file
a few seconds and several tens of seconds, and select "CD". (.wma, .mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
before play begins.
Press one of the buttons to select a
folder on the CD. It is advisable to restrict file names to
20 characters without using special characters
On a single disc, the CD player can (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying
read up to 255 MP3 files spread over problems.
8 folder levels. However, it is advisable Press one of the buttons to select a
to keep to a limit of two levels to reduce track on the CD.
the access time before the CD is
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR
played.
or CDRW, when recording, the ISO 9660
While the CD is being played, the folder Press the LIST button to display
level 1. 2 or Joliet file format is recommended.
structure is not followed. the list of directories of the MP3
If the disc is recorded in another format, it may
All of the files are displayed on a single compilation.
not be played correctly.
level.
It is recommended that the same recording
Press and hold one of the buttons for format is always used for an individual disc,
fast forward or backward play. with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
Joliet format is recommended.
372
Bluetooth® audio streaming Connecting Apple® players
Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT32 Streaming allows music files on the telephone Connect the Apple ® player to the USB port
(File Allocation Table). to be played via the audio system. using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Play starts automatically.
Connect the telephone: see the "Telephone" Control is via the audio system.
section.
It is recommended that you use
genuine Apple ® USB cables for correct Select in the "Bluetooth: Telephone - Audio" The classifications available are those of the
operation. menu the telephone to be connected. portable device connected (artists / albums /
The audio system connects to a newly paired genres / playlists / audiobooks / podcasts).
telephone automatically.
The version of software in the audio system
may not be compatible with the generation of
Activate the streaming source by your Apple ® player.
pressing the SOURCE button*.
Control of tracks to be played is via the buttons

on the audio system control panel and the
steering mounted controls**. The contextual
information can be displayed in the screen.
* In certain cases, play of the audio files must

be initiated from the keypad.
** If the telephone supports the function.
.
373
Telephone
Pairing a Bluetooth® telephone
Screen C
(Available according to model and version)
In the menu, select: Select the telephone to be connected from the
As a safety measure and because they
- "Bluetooth: Telephone - Audio" list. Only one telephone can be connected at
require prolonged attention on the part
- "Bluetooth configuration" a time.
of the driver, the operations for pairing
- "Perform a Bluetooth search"
of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with
the Bluetooth hands-free system of
your audio equipment must be carried
out with the vehicle stationary and the A window is displayed with a message that a A virtual keypad is displayed in the screen:
ignition on. search is in progress. enter a code with at least 4 digits.
Confirm by pressing OK.

Go to www.peugeot.co.uk for more information The services available depend on
(compatibility, more help, ...). the network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth device
A message in the screen indicates the telephone
used.
chosen. To accept the pairing, enter the same
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function Consult your telephone's manual and
code on the telephone, then confirm with OK.
and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone your operator to find out which services
If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not
configuration). are available to you.
limited.
Press the MENU button. The first 4 telephones recognised are displayed A message that the pairing has been
in this window. successful appears in the screen.
The automatic connection authorised is only

The "Telephone" menu permits access to the
active after the telephone has been configured.
following functions in particular: "Directory"*,
The directory and the call list can be accessed
"Calls list", "Consult the paired equipment".
after the necessary synchronisation period.
* If your telephone is fully compatible.

374
Receiving a call Making a call Ending a call

An incoming call is announced by a ring and a From the "Bluetooth: Telephone - Audio" During a call, press this button for
superimposed display in the screen. menu. more than 2 seconds.
Select "Manage the telephone call".
Select the YES tab on the display Select "Call". Confirm with OK to end the call.
using the buttons.
Or
Select "Calls list".
Confirm by pressing OK.
Or
Select "Directory".
The system accesses the telephone's
contacts directory, depending on its
Press this button at the steering Press this button for more than two
compatibility, and while it is connected
mounted controls to accept the call. seconds for access to your directory,
by Bluetooth.
then navigate using the thumb wheel.
Or
To dial a number, use your telephone's keypad,
with the vehicle stationary.
With certain telephones connected by
Bluetooth you can send a contact to the
directory of the audio system.
Contacts imported in this way are
saved in a permanent directory
visible to all, whatever the telephone
connected.
.
The menu for the directory is not
accessible if it is empty.
375
Screen menu map(s)

Screen A
Radio-CD Units Language
1 1 1
RDS options Temperature: °Celsius / °Fahrenheit Français

2 2 2
REG mode Fuel consumption: KM/L - L/100 - MPG Italiano

2 2
2
CD repeat Nederlands
2 2
Shuffle play Portuguès

2
2
Português do Brasil
Vehicle config* Display adjust 2
1 1
Deutsch
2
R wiper in rev Year
2 2 English
2
Guide lighting Month
2 2 Español
2
Day
2 Čeština
Options 2
1
Hour
2 Hrvatski
2
Diagnostic
2 Minutes
2 Magyar
2
View
3 12 H/24 H mode
2
Abandon
3 * The settings vary according to the trim level of
the vehicle.
376
Screen C
MEDIA TELEPHONE BLUETOOTH CONNECTION
Media parameters Call Connections management
1 1 1
Choice of playback mode Dial Search for a device

2 2
1
Normal Directory
3 2
Random Calls list

3 2
Random all Voice mail box

3 2
Repeat
3 Directory management
1
Choice of track listing
2
Consult an entry
2
By folders
3
Delete an entry
2
By artists
3
Delete all entries
2
By genres
3
Telephone management
By playlists 1
3
Telephone status
.
Radio parameters 2
1
Hang up
1
377
PERSONALISATION -
CONFIGURATION
1
Define the vehicle
parameters*
1
Choice of language
1
Display configuration
Choice of units
2
Date and time adjustment

2
Display parameters
2
Brightness
2
1
Choice of sounds
* Depending on vehicle equipment.

378
Frequently asked questions

The table below gives answers to the most frequently asked questions on your audio system.

With the engine off, the When the engine is switched off, the audio system operating time Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
audio system switches off depends on the state of charge of the battery. charge.
after a few minutes of use. The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy
mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's
battery.
The message "the audio In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to
system is overheated" is too high, the audio system switches to an automatic thermal allow the system to cool.
appears on the display. protection mode leading to a reduction in volume or CD play
stopping.
Radio
There is a difference in For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
sound quality between the Treble, Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to the
different audio sources sources, which may result in audible differences when changing sources listened to. It is advisable to set the audio
(radio, CD...). source (radio, CD...). functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear Balance, Left-
Right Balance) to the middle position, select the
musical ambience "None" and set the loudness
correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or
.
to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
379

The stored stations do An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the BAND AST button to return to the
not function (no sound, waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the
87.5 Mhz is displayed...). stations are stored.
The traffic announcement The radio station is not part of the regional traffic information Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic
(TA) is displayed. I do network. information.
not receive any traffic
information.
The quality of reception of The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station Activate the RDS function to enable the system
the radio station listened listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area to check whether there is a more powerful
to gradually deteriorates through which the vehicle is travelling. transmitter in the geographical area.
or the stored stations do
not function (no sound, The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, underground car parks...) This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
87.5 Mhz is displayed...). block reception, including in RDS mode. a failure of the audio equipment.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer.
through an automatic car wash or into an underground car park).
Sound cut-outs of 1 to During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for another Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is
2 seconds in radio mode. frequency giving better reception of the station. too frequent and always on the same route.
380
Media
The message "USB The battery of the peripheral may not be sufficiently charged. Recharge the battery of the peripheral device.
peripheral error" is
displayed on the screen.
The Bluetooth connection The USB memory stick is not recognised. Reformat the USB memory stick.
is cut. The USB memory stick may be corrupt.
The CD is ejected The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any - Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
automatically or is not audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. right way up.
played by the player. The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is - Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
not recognised by the audio equipment. be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The CD player sound is The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
poor. conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
unsuitable. an ambience.
.
381
Telephone
I am unable to access my Few telephones or service providers allow the use of this function.
voicemail.
382
Alphabetical index
A C
ABS................................................................120 Assistance, emergency braking....................120 Cable, audio........................................... 316, 371
Accessories...................................................220 Audible warning.............................................120 Capacity, fuel tank......................................... 213
Accessory position........................................152 Audio streaming (Bluetooth)..................318, 373 Cap, fuel filler................................................. 213
Additive, AdBlue............................... 26, 235-241 Auxiliary...........................................83, 316, 371 CD.......................................................... 316, 371
Additive, Diesel......................................232, 233 CD, MP3................................................. 317, 372
Adjusting headlamps..................................... 114 Central locking.............................. 49, 54, 56, 57
Adjusting head Changing a bulb..................................... 256-265
restraints........................................................75 Changing a fuse..................................... 266-271
Adjusting seats...........................................72, 73 Changing a wheel.................................. 250-255
Adjusting the air Changing a wiper blade.........................118, 222
distribution........................................ 93, 95, 98 Changing the remote
Adjusting the air flow........................... 92, 94, 98 control battery.........................................53, 62
Adjusting the date...................................... 44-47 Checking the engine oil level...................31, 229
B
Adjusting the height and reach Checking the levels................................ 229-232
of the steering wheel..................................... 71 Checking tyre pressures
Adjusting the lumbar (using the kit)...............................................244
support...........................................................72 Battery.....................................219, 233, 272-274 Checks.................................. 227, 228, 233, 234
Adjusting the temperature...............................96 Battery, charging............................................ 274 Checks, routine..................................... 233, 234
Adjusting the time................................44, 45, 47 Battery, remote control....................... 53, 62, 63 Child lock........................................................145
Advice on driving................................... 146, 147 Bicycle carrier................................................224 Children................................... 125, 127, 130-145
Affaire version................................................294 Blanking screen (snow shield)............... 217, 218 Children (safety).............................................145
Airbags.....................................................23, 126 Blind, panoramic roof.....................................103 Child seats..............................130-132, 136, 141
Airbags, curtain......................................128, 129 Blind spot sensors...................................16, 195 Child seats, conventional...............................136
Airbags, front.........................................126, 129 BlueHDi....................................................26, 235 Child seats, ISOFIX....................................... 141
Airbags, lateral.......................................128, 129 Bluetooth (hands-free)...........................350, 374 Closing the boot.........................................58, 59
Air conditioning............................. 10, 92, 94, 96 Bluetooth (telephone).............................350, 374 Closing the doors.......................... 49, 54, 56, 57
Air conditioning, digital....................................96 Bonnet............................................................226 Collision risk alert..........................................190
Air conditioning, manual............................92, 94 Boot............................................................58, 59 Compressor, tyre inflation.............................244
Air intake........................................................100 Boot lamp.........................................................87 Configuration, vehicle......................................42
Air vents...........................................................90 Brake discs.....................................................234 Connection, Bluetooth...........................350, 374
Alarm................................................................65 Brake lamps...........................................261, 263 Container, AdBlue..........................................239
Anti-lock braking system Brakes................................................21, 24, 234 Control, electric windows.................................69
(ABS)...........................................................120 Braking, automatic on risk of Control, emergency boot release....................60
Anti-pinch.................................................69, 103 collision..........................................22, 190, 193 Control, emergency door.................................61
.
Anti-theft............................................51, 63, 154 Braking, dynamic emergency........................159 Control, heated seats.......................................75
Armrest, front.............................................80, 82 Bulbs (changing).................................... 256-265 Control stalk, lighting.....................................108
Armrest, rear....................................................85 Control stalk, wipers...................................... 115
ASR................................................................120 Courtesy lamps..............................................104
Assistance call.......................................119, 296 Cover, load space...................................... 87, 88
383
Alphabetical index
F
Cruise control................................. 173, 177, 180 Dynamic (sport)..............................................169 Filling the AdBlue tank...................................242
Cruise control, active.....................................180 Dynamic stability control Filling the fuel tank................................. 213, 215
Cup holder........................................................80 (DSC)....................................... 17, 21, 120, 122 Filter, air.........................................................233
Filter, oil..........................................................233
Filter, particle.........................................232, 233
Filter, passenger compartment......................233
Fitting a wheel................................................254
Fitting roof bars..............................................223
Fittings, boot..............................................86, 87
Fittings, interior................................................80
Flap, fuel filler................................................. 213
Flashing indicators......................................... 111
D E
Foglamps, front..............................110, 256, 260
Foglamps, rear............................... 110, 261, 263
Folding the rear seats......................................78
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) - EBA................................................................120 Frequency (radio)...................................312, 366
Digital radio..........................................314, 368 Eco-driving (advice).........................................10 Fuel................................................................ 215
Date (setting).............................................. 44-47 Economy mode.............................................. 219 Fuel consumption.............................................10
Daytime running Electronic brake force distribution Fuel tank..................................................22, 213
lamps........................... 109, 112, 256, 257, 259 (EBFD).........................................................120 Fusebox, engine compartment......................270
Deactivating the passenger Emergency call......................................119, 296 Fuses..............................................................266
airbag................................................... 127, 133 Emergency
Deactivation of DSC (ESC)............................122 warning lamps..................................... 119, 243
Deadlocking...............................................50, 58 Emissions control system, SCR.............. 27, 235
Demisting/defrosting, front............................101 Energy economy mode..................................219
Demisting/defrosting, rear.....................102, 106 Engine compartment.............................227, 228
Denon (audio system)............................. 88, 298 Engine, Diesel..........15, 215, 228, 277, 284, 288
Dimensions....................................................292 Engine, petrol................................. 215, 227, 278
Dipstick.....................................................31, 229 Environment.......................... 10, 53, 62, 91, 102,
Direction indicators........ 111, 256, 259, 261, 263 168, 232, 241, 274
G
Display of inter-vehicle time...........................187 ESC/ASR.................................................. 17, 120
Display screen,
instrument panel....................................12, 164
Display screen, multifunction Gauge, fuel.............................................. 12, 213
(with audio system)..................................45, 46 Gearbox, automatic.............................. 162, 165,
Display screen, multifunction 169-171, 177, 181, 234, 274
(without audio system)...................................47 Gearbox, manual.......................................... 162,
Driving economically.......................................10 163, 170, 177, 181, 234
Driving positions (storing)................................ 74 Gear lever, automatic gearbox......................165
384
Alphabetical index
I K
Gear lever, manual gearbox..........................163 Identification, vehicle.....................................295 Key............................................................. 48-63
Gear shift indicator........................................164 Ignition on........................................99, 150, 152 Keyless Entry
Glove box, refrigerated....................................80 Immobiliser, electronic.......................51, 63, 154 and Starting....................... 56-58, 63, 151, 154
Guide-me-home............................................. 113 Indicator, Key with remote control............... 49, 51, 57, 154
coolant temperature......................................28 Kit, hands-free.......................................350, 374
Indicator, engine oil level.................................31 Kit, temporary puncture repair...........86, 87, 244
Indicator lamps, operation..........................13-17
Indicators, direction....................................... 111
Inflating tyres...........................................10, 295
Inflating tyres and accessories
(using the kit)...............................................249
Instrument panel.............................................. 12
Intelligent Traction Control............................. 121
H
Interactive help......................................... 41, 341
Inter-vehicle time............................................187
L
ISOFIX seats.................................................. 141
Hazard warning lamps........................... 119, 243 Isofix mountings.................................139, 140
Hazard warning lamps,
automatic operation..................................... 119 Labels, identification......................................295
Headlamp adjustment.................................... 114 LEDs - light-emitting diodes..........256, 261, 263
Headlamps, automatic Level, AdBlue ® additive..................................235
illumination................................... 109, 112, 113 Level, brake fluid............................................231
Headlamps, dipped beam............. 108, 256, 258 Level, Diesel additive.............................232, 233
Headlamps, halogen............................. 256, 258 Level, engine coolant...............................28, 231
Headlamps, main beam........ 108, 256, 258, 260 Level, engine oil.......................................31, 229
Headlamp wash............................................. 116 Level, headlamp wash............................117, 231
J
Head restraints, front.......................................75 Levels and checks................. 227-229, 231, 232
Head restraints, rear..................................78, 79 Level, screenwash fluid..........................117, 231
Heating.......................................... 90, 92, 94, 96 Light-emitting diodes - LEDs.........256, 261, 263
Hill start assist................................................162 Jack................................................................250 Lighting...........................................................108
Lighting dimmer...............................................33
Lighting, guide-me home......................... 51, 113
Lighting, interior.....................................104, 105
Lighting, mood...............................................105
.
Lighting, welcome.......................................... 113
Loading....................................................10, 223
Load reduction mode.....................................219
Locating your vehicle................................. 51, 55
Locking.............................................................63
385
Alphabetical index
N
Long objects, transporting...............................85 Net, high load retaining....................................89 Parking sensors, front....................................198
Low fuel level...........................................22, 213 Number plate lamps.......................................265 Parking sensors, rear....................................198
Luggage retaining strap.............................86, 87 PEUGEOT Connect Apps..............................345
Lumbar.......................................................72, 76 PEUGEOT Connect Assistance....................296
PEUGEOT Connect Packs............................296
PEUGEOT Connect SOS..............................296
PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5).................363
Plates, identification......................................295
Player, Apple ®........................................318, 373
Player, MP3 CD...................................... 317, 372
Port, USB...................................80, 83, 316, 370
O
Pressures, tyres............................ 244, 249, 295
Pre-tensioning seat belts...............................125
M
Priming the fuel system.................................277
Oil change......................................................229 Protecting children.................. 125, 127, 130-145
Oil consumption.............................................229 Puncture.........................................................244
Maintenance, routine.......................................10 OIl, engine......................................................229
Map reading lamps........................................104 Opening the bonnet.......................................226
Markings, identification..................................295 Opening the boot.................... 48, 54, 56, 58, 59
Massage function.............................................76 Opening the doors.............................. 48, 54, 56
Mat...................................................................81
Memorising a speed...................................... 173
Menu, main....................................................366
Menus (audio).......................306, 308, 310, 320,
322, 326, 346, 348
R
Menus (Touch screen).................. 299, 304, 305
Mirror, rear view.............................................107
Mirrors, door..................................102, 106, 195
Misfuel prevention.......................................... 214 Radio......................................................312, 366
P
Mountings, Isofix....................................139, 140 Radio, digital (Digital Audio
MP3 CD.................................................. 317, 372 Broadcasting - DAB)............................314, 368
Range, AdBlue...............................................236
Pads, brake....................................................234 RDS........................................................313, 367
Paint colour code...........................................295 Rear screen, demisting..................................102
Panoramic glass sunroof...............................103 Recharging the battery.................................. 274
Parcel shelf, rear..............................................86 Recirculation, air............................................100
Park Assist............................................. 201-208 Reduction of electrical load...........................219
Parking brake...................................15, 154, 234 Regeneration of the particle
Parking brake, electric.................... 20, 155, 234 filter..............................................................233
386
Alphabetical index
Reinitialisation of the under-inflation Screen menu.........................306, 308, 310, 320, Storage...........................................80, 82, 85-87
detection system..........................................210 322, 326, 334, 346, 348 Storage wells.............................................86, 87
Reinitialising the remote control................53, 62 Screen, multifunction Storing driving positions.................................. 74
Reminder, key in ignition................................150 (with audio system)......................... 45, 46, 366 Stowing rings.............................................86, 87
Reminder, lighting on..................................... 111 Screen, multifunction Switching off the engine................................148
Remote control........................................... 48-63 (without audio system)...................................47 Synchronising the remote control..............53, 62
Removing a wheel.........................................252 Screenwash................................................... 116
Removing the mat............................................81 Screenwash, rear........................................... 116
Replacing bulbs..................................... 256-265 SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction).............235
Replacing fuses..................................... 266-271 Seat belts........................................123-125, 136
Replacing the air filter....................................233 Seats, electric..................................................73
Replacing the oil filter....................................233 Seats, front..................................................72-74
Replacing the passenger compartment Seats, heated...................................................75
filter..............................................................233 Seats, rear.................................................. 77, 78
Reservoir, headlamp wash............................231 Serial number, vehicle...................................295
T
Reservoir, screenwash..................................231 Service indicator..............................................28
Resetting the service indicator........................30 Service (warning lamp)....................................19
Resetting the trip recorder...............................32 Servicing..........................................................10
Reversing camera..........................................200 Settings, equipment......................................... 41 Table of weights.....................................281, 288
Reversing lamp......................................261, 263 Settings (Menus)............................................334 Tables of engines.................. 278, 280, 284, 287
Risk areas (update)........................................331 Settings, system.............................................342 Tables of fuses...............................................266
Roof bars........................................................223 Sidelamps.............. 108, 256, 257, 259-261, 263 Tank, AdBlue ® additive.......................... 235-242
Running out of fuel (Diesel)...........................277 Side repeater.................................................260 Tank, fuel........................................................ 213
Ski flap.............................................................85 Technical data........................................ 278-295
Snow chains...........................................209, 216 Telephone..............................................350, 374
Socket, 12 V accessory.......................80, 83, 87 Temperature, coolant.......................................28
Socket, 230 V.............................................80, 84 Three flashes (direction indicators)............... 111
Sockets, audio...........................80, 83, 316, 371 Time (setting)............................................. 44-47
Speed limiter.......................................... 173, 174 TMC (Traffic info)...........................................332
Spotlamps, side..................................... 114, 260 Tools.......................................................244, 250
Stability control (ESC)............................. 17, 120 Topping-up the AdBlue ® additive........... 239-242
Starting the engine........................................148 Top tether.......................................................139
S
Station, radio..........................................312, 366 Total distance recorder....................................32
Stay, bonnet...................................................226 Touch screen........................35, 37-44, 173, 211
.
Steering mounted controls, audio........ 303, 365 Touch screen (Menus).................. 299, 304, 305
Safety, children....................... 125, 127, 130-145 Steering wheel, adjustment............................. 71 Towbar.................................................... 147, 218
Screen, cold climate...................................... 217 Stop & Start......................... 16, 24, 36, 101, 170, Towed loads...........................................281, 288
Screen, colour....................................... 304, 305 171, 213, 226, 233, 272 Towing another vehicle..................................275
Screen, instrument panel...........................12, 34 Stop (warning lamp).........................................18 Towing eye.......................................................86
387
Alphabetical index
V
Traction control (ASR)....................... 17, 21, 120 Ventilation................................90-92, 94, 98, 99
Traffic information (TA)......................... 333, 367
Traffic information (TMC)...............................332
Trailer..................................................... 147, 218
Triangle, warning...........................................243
Trip computer............................................. 34-36
Trip distance recorder......................................32
Tyre pressures...............................................255
Tyres.................................................................10
Tyre under-inflation detection.... 24, 209-212, 249
W
Warning and indicator lamps..................... 13-27
Warning lamp, braking system........................21
Warning lamp, Diesel engine pre-heater........15
Warning lamps........................................... 18-27
Warning lamp, SCR emissions control
system............................................................27
U
Warning lamp, Service....................................19
Warning lamp, Stop.........................................18
Weights..................................................281, 288
Under-inflation Wheel, spare....................................86, 250, 251
(detection).............................. 24, 209-212, 249 Window controls..............................................69
Unlocking............................................ 48, 54, 56 Wiper blades (changing)........................118, 222
Updating risk areas........................................331 Wiper, rear..................................................... 116
Updating the date....................................... 44-47 Wipers.............................................. 16, 115, 118
Updating the time....................................... 44-47 Wipers, automatic rain sensitive.............115, 117
UREA.................................................... 235, 236
USB..................................................83, 316, 371
388
389
390
391
392
Reproduction or translation of all or part of We draw your attention to the following
Labels are applied at various points:
this document is prohibited without written
points on your vehicle. They carry
authorisation from Automobiles PEUGEOT. - The fitting of electrical equipment or
safety warnings as well as vehicle
accessories not listed by PEUGEOT may
identification information. Do not cause faults and failures with the
remove them: they form an integral electrical system of your vehicle. Contact
part of your vehicle. Automobiles PEUGEOT declares, by a PEUGEOT dealer for information on
application of the provisions of the European the range of recommended accessories.
legislation (Directive 2000/53) relating - As a safety measure, access to the
to End of Life Vehicles, that it achieves diagnostic socket, used for the vehicle's
the objectives set by this legislation and electronic systems, is reserved strictly
that recycled materials are used in the for PEUGEOT dealers or qualified
manufacture of the products that it sells. workshops, equipped with the special
diagnostic tool required (risk of
malfunctions of the vehicle's electronic
systems that could cause breakdowns
For any work on your vehicle, use a qualified or serious accidents). The manufacturer
workshop that has the technical information, cannot be held responsible if this advice
competence and equipment required, which is not followed.
a PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide. - Any modification or adaptation not
intended or authorised by Automobiles
PEUGEOT or carried out without
meeting the technical requirements
defined by the manufacturer would
lead to the suspension of the legal and
contractual warranties.
Printed in the EU
Anglais
06-15
Anglais
www.peugeot.com AN. 15308.0041
Special position of the Heated windscreen and

windscreen wipers washer jets*
To maintain the effectiveness of the
wiper blades, it is advisable to:
- handle them with care,
- clean them regularly using soapy
water,
- avoid using them to retain
cardboard on the windscreen,
- replace them at the first signs of
wear.
This position permits release of the windscreen

wiper blades.
It is used for cleaning or replacement of the This function heats the winsdcreen and washer
blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to jets under cold conditions.
detach the blades from the windscreen. In area 1, the heating frees the wiper blades
when they are stuck by snow or ice.
In area 2, the heating improves visibility by
) Any action on the wiper stalk in the minute
avoiding the accumulation of snow when the
after switching off the ignition places the
wipers are operating.
blades vertically on the screen.
) To park the blades again, switch on the
ignition and operate the wiper stalk. Switching on
) With the engine running, press
this button; its indicator lamp
comes on.
The period of operation depends
on the ambient temperature.
Pressing this button again switches the function
off; its indicator lamp goes off.
* Depending on the country of sale.
106
Driving
Electric parking brake

The driver can take over at any time to apply
In the event of a battery failure, the
or release the parking brake, by operating the
electric parking brake no longer works.
control lever.
As a safety measure, if the parking
brake is not applied, immobilise the
- By briefly pulling the control vehicle by engaging a gear (with a
lever to apply the brake, manual gearbox) or placing a chock at
one of the wheels.
- By briefly pushing qualified workshop.
The system allows the application of the the control lever, while
parking brake on switching off the engine and pressing the foot
release as the vehicle moves off. brake, to release.
The indicator lamp in the control lever Never leave a child alone inside the
Indicator lamp
This indicator lamp comes on in the
instrument panel and in the control
flashes during manual application or
release.
vehicle with the ignition on, as they
could release the parking brake.
6
lever to confirm the application of the
parking brake. When towing, parking on a steep slope,
or if your vehicle is heavily laden,
The technology adopted for the electric turn the wheels towards the kerb and
It goes off to confirm the release of the parking parking brake does not allow the fitment engage a gear.
brake. of wheels smaller than 16 inches. For towing, you vehicle is approved for
parking on slopes of up to 12%.
155

Peugeot 308 Manual PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Peugeot 308 Manual PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Handbook

Select one of the following means of access to view your

If the "MyPeugeot" function is not available on the Peugeot

This handbook describes all of the equipment available

This document is an integral part of your vehicle. It should be

safety warning additional information contributes to the protection of the

Overview . Access Lighting and visibility

Driving Practical information Technical data

Exterior Electric windows, deactivation 69-70

Keyless Entry and Starting remote Door mirrors 106, 114

Interior fittings 80-84

Seat belts 123-125

SW Front seats 72-76

Rear seats 78-79

Interior fittings 80-84

Seat belts 123-125

Dashboard fuses 266-269

Setting the date and time 44-47

Heating, ventilation 90-93

Instruments and controls (cont.)

Hazard warning lamps 119

Memorising speeds 173 Steering wheel adjustment 71

Running out of fuel, 12V battery 272-274

Changing bulbs 256-265

Opening the bonnet 226

Limit the causes of excess consumption Observe the recommendations on

Dials and screens Control buttons

Indicator and warning lamps

Operation indicator lamps

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Left-hand flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk is pushed down.

Right-hand flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk is pushed up.

Sidelamps fixed. The lighting stalk is in the

Dipped beam fixed. The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped

Warning / indicator lamp

The rear foglamps are on.

Turn the ring on the stalk rearward to switch off the

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Deactivation indicator lamps

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Warning / indicator lamp

A minor fault has occurred for which

Identify the fault by means of the associated

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Warning / indicator lamp

The brake fluid level has dropped

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

fixed. The Emergency Collision Braking System

Warning / indicator lamp

A seat belt has not been fastened or

Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.

* Depending on the country of sale.

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Warning or indicator lamp

fixed, associated with a

Warning or indicator lamp

Warning or indicator lamp

Gauges and indicators

For BlueHDi Diesel versions, the degree of

More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km)

5 seconds after the ignition is switched on,

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Warning / indicator lamp

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Warning / indicator lamp

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Warning / indicator lamp

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Warning / indicator lamp

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations